See Full Document Text
Published under Section 45ZM of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934
Monetary Policy Report
OCTOBER 2025
Reserve Bank of India
MumbaiContents
Chapter I: Macroeconomic Outlook 1
I.1: Key Developments since the April 2025 MPR 1
I.2: The Outlook for Inflation 6
I.3: Growth Outlook 9
I.4: Balance of Risks 12
I.5: Conclusion 15
Box I.1: The Effect of Credit Conditions on Monetary Policy 9
Chapter II: Prices and Costs 16
II.1: Introduction 16
II.2: Developments across Major Components of the CPI 17
II.3: Decoding the Inflation Dynamics 26
II.4: Drivers of Inflation Trajectory 28
II.5: Conclusion 33
Box: II.1: Sharp Rise and Slow Fade: Nature of Food Inflation Cycles in India 18
Chapter III: Demand and Output 34
III.1: Aggregate Demand 34
III.2: Aggregate Supply 47
III.3: Conclusion 55
Box III.1: Consumer Confidence Channel: The Perception Pathway in Policy Transmission to
Private Consumption 36
Box III.2: External Demand and Fixed Investment Dynamics: An Empirical Investigation with
Firm-level Data 39
Chapter IV: Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets 56
IV.1: Liquidity Conditions and the Operating Procedure of Monetary Policy 56
IV.2: Domestic Financial Markets 61
IV.3: Transmission to Lending and Deposit Rates 81
IV.4: Conclusion 86
Box IV.1: Review of the Extant Liquidity Management Framework – Major Recommendations 57
Box IV.2: Impact of Monetary Policy Surprises on Financial Conditions 61
Chapter V: External Environment 87
V.1: Global Economic Conditions 87
V.2: Commodity Prices and Inflation 91
V.3: Monetary Policy Stance 94
V.4: Global Financial Markets 97
V.5: Conclusion 102
Box V.1: Pass-through of US Treasury Yields to Emerging Market Bond Yields 100
iABBREVIATIONS
AEs - Advanced Economies GDP - Gross Domestic Product
ASEAN - Association of Southeast Asian Nations GoI - Government of India
BE - Budget Estimates G-sec - Government Securities
BIS - Bank for International Settlements GST - Goods and Services Tax
bps - Basis points GVA - Gross Value Added
BSE - Bombay Stock Exchange H1 - First Half of the Financial Year (April-
September)
CAG - Comptroller and Auditor General
H2 - Second Half of the Financial Year
CASA - Current Account and Savings Account
(October-March)
CDs - Certificates of Deposit
ICR - Interest Coverage Ratio
CGA - Controller General of Accounts
IIP - Index of Industrial Production
CI - Confidence Interval
IMF - International Monetary Fund
CiC - Currency in Circulation
INR - Indian Rupee
CII - Confederation of Indian Industry
IPO - Initial Public Offering
COVID - Corona Virus Disease
IT - Information Technology
CPI - Consumer Price Index
LAF - Liquidity Adjustment Facility
CPs - Commercial Papers
LPG - Liquefied Petroleum Gas
CRR - Cash Reserve Ratio
MCLR - Marginal Cost of Funds-based Lending
DCA - Department of Consumer Affairs
Rate
DGCI&S - Directorate General of Commercial
m-o-m - Month-on-Month
Intelligence and Statistics
MPC - Monetary Policy Committee
DII - Domestic Institutional Investor
MPR - Monetary Policy Report
EBLR - External Benchmark-based Lending Rate
MSCI - Morgan Stanley Capital International
ECI - Eight Core Industries
MSF - Marginal Standing Facility
EM - Emerging Market
MSME - Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises
EMEs - Emerging Market Economies
EPFO - Employees’ Provident Fund NBFCs - Non-Banking Financial Companies
Organisation
NCAER - National Council of Applied Economic
EWMA - Exponential Weighted Moving Average Research
FCI - Financial Conditions Index NDTL - Net Demand and Time Liabilities
FDI - Foreign Direct Investment NIMs - Net Interest Margins
FI - Financial Institution NSDL - National Securities Depository Limited
FPI - Foreign Portfolio Investment/Investor NSO - National Statistics Office
GARCH - Generalized Autoregressive Conditional OECD - Organisation for Economic Cooperation
Heteroskedasticity and Development
iiiiiiMonetary Policy Report October 2025
OIS - Overnight Indexed Swap SAE - Second Advance Estimates
OMOs - Open Market Operations SCBs - Scheduled Commercial Banks
OPEC - Organization of the Petroleum SDF - Standing Deposit Facility
Exporting Countries
SIP - Systematic Investment Plan
PCE - Personal Consumption Expenditure
SLR - Statutory Liquidity Ratio
PFCE - Private Final Consumption Expenditure
SPD - Standalone Primary Dealers
PMI - Purchasing Managers’ Index
T-bill - Treasury Bill
POL - Petroleum, Oil and Lubricants
TMA - Tractor and Mechanization Association
PP - Peak-to-peak
TOP - Tomato, Onion and Potato
PSBs - Public Sector Banks
TT - Trough-to-trough
PSUs - Public Sector Undertakings
UK - United Kingdom
PVBs - Private Sector Banks
US - United States of America
Q1 - First Quarter
US$ - US Dollar
Q2 - Second Quarter
UT - Union Territory
Q3 - Third Quarter
VAR - Vector Autoregression
Q4 - Fourth Quarter
VRR - Variable Rate Repo
q-o-q - Quarter-on-Quarter
VRRR - Variable Rate Reverse Repo
QPM - Quarterly Projection Model
WACR - Weighted Average Call Rate
RBI - Reserve Bank of India
WADTDRs - Weighted Average Domestic Term
RECO - Revenue Expenditure to Capital Outlay Deposit Rates
REER - Real Effective Exchange Rate WALRs - Weighted Average Lending Rates
RHS - Right Hand Side WMA - Ways and Means Advances
S&P - Standard & Poor’s WPI - Wholesale Price Index
SAAR - Seasonally Adjusted Annualised Rate y-o-y - Year-on-Year
iivvChapter I Macroeconomic Outlook
I. Macroeconomic Outlook
Amidst heightened trade uncertainties, India’s economic outlook remains resilient, aided by improved consumption,
investment demand and strong macroeconomic fundamentals. GST 2.0 reforms are expected to further boost
domestic demand. Inflation is expected to gradually pick up from Q4:2025-26 on unfavourable base effect,
despite the moderating impact of GST rationalisation. Against the backdrop of volatile global financial markets,
elevated tariff-related risks, and continued geopolitical strife, monetary policy remains focussed on maintaining
price stability and sustained economic growth.
I.1 Key Developments since the April 2025 MPR continued to exert pressure. In September 2025, US
financial markets displayed risk on sentiment with
Since the release of the Monetary Policy Report (MPR)
equity markets rallying amidst US Federal Reserve
in April 2025, global economic growth has remained
(Fed) rate cut and strong performance by technology
steady, but still below its historical average.1 Trade
companies. Bond yields softened and the dollar
tensions, aggravated by tariff measures, along with
weakened in the first half of September following the
geopolitical tensions continued to weigh on the global
Fed’s rate cut; however, these trends reversed after
outlook. Headline inflation has moderated in several
the release of stronger-than-expected economic data.
economies. However, it still remains above target in
most jurisdictions, even as core inflation pressures Global commodity prices generally softened due to
eased. As a result, monetary policy pathways continue weakening demand and improved supply conditions,
to diverge across countries. Several central banks although volatility persisted across segments.
moved cautiously into an easing cycle, although Industrial metal prices fell sharply in April 2025
lingering inflation pressures necessitated a guarded on account of demand concerns but firmed up
approach. In contrast, some central banks have in subsequent months. Agricultural prices eased
adopted a more accommodative stance to counter overall, mainly led by cereals, even as vegetable oils
their slowing growth and rising unemployment. increased on account of tighter supplies and stronger
demand. Brent crude prices remained volatile, with
Financial market volatility persisted, with global
a downward bias during this period, in response to
equities retreating in April 2025 amidst tariff-related
shifting demand conditions and supply outlook.
uncertainties. Since then, markets have rebounded
and reached new highs. Sovereign bond yields in Turning to the domestic economy, India’s credit rating
major advanced economies (AEs) have hardened since was recently upgraded to BBB+ (Stable) by Rating and
April 2025, reflecting investor concerns over fiscal Investment Information, Inc. (R&I), Japan, and to BBB
risks. At the same time, gold prices continued their (Stable) by Standard and Poor's (S&P) Global Ratings,
upward trajectory as demand strengthened for safe- reflecting confidence in the country’s strong domestic
haven assets, underscoring persistent uncertainty. demand, fiscal discipline, and external stability.
The United States (US) Dollar Index fell about 11 per Real gross domestic product (GDP) expanded by 7.8
cent from January 2025 till end of June, witnessing its per cent in Q1:2025-26, the fastest pace in seven
steepest fall in over a decade. With modest rebound in quarters. Growth was driven by strong private and
the subsequent months, the index stabilised, though government consumption and buoyant gross fixed
concerns over fiscal risks and expectation of rate cuts capital formation. On the supply side, real gross
1 The estimates and projections in the October 2025 MPR are based on statistical information available till September 26, 2025, which may not reflect
the latest available data in all cases.
11Monetary Policy Report October 2025
value added (GVA) rose by 7.6 per cent, driven by a 9 potential revisions to the tolerance band of +/- 2 per
per cent expansion in services, and robust growth in cent, and whether to maintain a specific target level
manufacturing. Agriculture and allied activities also or only a range for inflation.
improved with a 3.7 per cent increase.
Monetary Policy Committee Meetings: April 2025 –
Headline Consumer Price Index (CPI) inflation eased September 2025
to 3.2 per cent in April 2025, from 4.7 per cent in
The MPC met in April 2025 amidst heightened global
H2:2024-25, aided by favourable base effects and
uncertainties from trade tariff measures which
falling food prices. It moderated further to 1.6 per
impeded global growth and inflation prospects. The
cent in July 2025, the lowest reading in eight years,
dollar index declined sharply and equity sell-offs
as food inflation turned negative in June and July
became broad-based especially in emerging markets.
2025. Even in August, inflation remained benign at
On the domestic front, sustained rural demand,
2.1 per cent driven down by deflation in vegetables
higher government capital expenditure, and healthy
and pulses. Core inflation (i.e., CPI excluding food
balance sheet of corporates and banks supported
and fuel), however, largely remained steady around
growth and the investment outlook, although the
4 per cent.
headwinds from global trade disruptions posed
The Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) continued downside risks. Consequently, the real GDP growth
its easing cycle, initiated in February 2025, with a projection for 2025-26 was revised downwards by 20
25 basis points (bps) cut in April 2025, followed by bps to 6.5 per cent. Headline CPI inflation declined
a frontloaded cut of 50 bps in June 2025, bringing by 160 bps during January-February 2025, reaching
the repo rate down to 5.5 per cent. The stance of a 21-month low of 3.8 per cent in February 2025 on
policy was shifted to accommodative in April from account of falling food prices. The outlook for food
neutral in February but reverted to neutral in June inflation improved with a broad-based seasonal
indicating the limited policy space for further easing. correction in vegetable prices. It was expected
In addition, the RBI announced a phased 100 bps to soften further, aided by robust kharif arrivals
reduction in the cash reserve ratio (CRR) in four and record wheat production, despite risks from
tranches starting September 2025 to ease liquidity global market uncertainties and adverse weather.
conditions. At its August meeting, the MPC kept the Consequently, the CPI inflation projection for 2025-
repo rate unchanged at 5.5 per cent while retaining 26 was revised downwards to 4 per cent. The MPC
the neutral stance, reaffirming its commitment to noted that there was greater confidence in the
aligning inflation with the target while supporting durable alignment of headline inflation with the
growth. target, but growth still remained on a recovery path.
Accordingly, the MPC unanimously voted to reduce
On the brink of the next review of the monetary
the policy repo rate by 25 bps to 6.0 per cent and
policy framework due in March 20262, the Reserve
change the stance from neutral to accommodative to
Bank has issued a discussion paper on August 21,
continue supporting growth.
2025, inviting public comments on four key aspects
– the choice between headline and core inflation, the At the time of the June 2025 meeting, uncertainty
appropriateness of the 4 per cent inflation target, around the global economic outlook had somewhat
2 In May 2016, the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 was amended to provide a statutory basis for the inflation targeting framework in India. As per Section
45ZA of the Act, the Central Government, in consultation with the Reserve Bank, is required to set the CPI-based inflation target once in every five years.
For the first cycle (2016–2021) and the ongoing second cycle (2021-2026), the RBI was tasked with maintaining inflation at 4 per cent, with a tolerance
band of +/- 2 per cent. The next review is due by March 2026.
2Chapter I Macroeconomic Outlook
eased, though global sentiments remained weak. prolonged geopolitical tensions, persisting global
Domestic economic activity was, however, expected uncertainties and volatility in global financial markets
to maintain momentum in 2025-26, supported posed risks. Nonetheless, real GDP projection for
by private consumption, traction in fixed capital 2025-26 was retained at 6.5 per cent. The MPC noted
formation, and the conclusion of the Free Trade that while growth has held up well, the decline in
Agreement (FTA) with the United Kingdom. Given inflation was largely driven by food prices, especially
the expected domestic resilience amid challenging vegetables. Inflation was expected to firm up from
external environment, the projection of real GDP Q4:2025-26. It also underscored that uncertainties on
growth for 2025-26 was retained at 6.5 per cent. tariffs were still evolving, and the impact of past policy
Headline CPI inflation continued to decline in rate cuts were still progressing through the economy.
Accordingly, the MPC unanimously voted to keep the
March and April, led by falling food prices while core
repo rate unchanged at 5.5 per cent and to maintain
inflation remained largely stable. With the outlook
the neutral stance.
for food inflation also staying favourable, CPI
inflation projection for 2025-26 was again revised The MPC’s voting pattern reflects the diversity in
downwards by 30 bps to 3.7 per cent. The MPC noted individual members’ assessments, expectations and
that the near- and medium-term outlook for inflation policy preferences – a characteristic also reflected
gave confidence that headline inflation would in voting patterns of other central banks (Table I.1).
remain durably aligned with the target, and might With the pace of disinflation slowing down or even
even undershoot it marginally. However, growth reversing in some AEs, central banks are moving
remained lower than aspirations. Accordingly, the cautiously in this easing cycle. Among AEs, the US
MPC voted, by a 5-1 majority, to reduce the policy cut its policy rate for the first time this calendar year
repo rate by 50 bps to 5.5 per cent, frontloading while Japan kept its policy rates unchanged over its
the rate cut to stimulate private consumption and last four meetings.
investment through policy levers to step up the
growth momentum. One member voted for a smaller Table I.1 Monetary Policy Committees Meetings
25 bps cut in the policy repo rate. The stance was also and Policy Rate Voting Patterns
changed from accommodative to neutral, recognising Country Policy Meetings: April 2025 - September 2025
Total Meetings Meetings Variation
that after a cumulative policy rate cut of 100 bps in
meetings with full without in policy
quick succession, monetary policy had limited space consensus full rate (basis
consensus points)
to support growth further.
Brazil 4 4 0 75
In the run up to the August 2025 meeting, headline Chile 4 4 0 -25
Colombia 3 1 2 -25
CPI inflation declined for the eighth consecutive
Czech Republic 4 3 1 -25
month to 2.1 per cent in June 2025, primarily driven Hungary* 6 5 0 0
India 3 2 1 -75
by a fall in food prices to new lows. Assuming a normal
Japan 4 3 1 0
monsoon, CPI inflation projection for 2025-26 was
South Africa 3 1 2 -50
revised downwards to 3.1 per cent. Domestic growth Sweden 4 3 1 -50
Thailand 3 1 2 -50
remained resilient, with private consumption aided
UK 4 0 4 -50
by rural demand and fixed investment supported by
US 4 2 2 -25
buoyant government capex. Lower inflation, rising Notes: 1. Minus sign indicates a reduction in policy rate.
2. *: Total number of meetings happened is six. However, the
capacity utilisation, and congenial financial conditions minutes of last meeting (September 23, 2025) is not published
to date.
continued to support growth outlook. However, Sources: Central bank websites.
33Factors conditioning the Macroeconomic Outlook
Table I.2: Baseline Assumptions for Projections
Macroeconomic developments pertaining to inflation
Indicator MPR April 2025 MPR October 2025
and economic activity during H1:2025-26 (April-
Crude Oil US$ 70 per barrel US$ 70 per barrel
September 2025) are analysed in Chapters II and (Indian Basket) during 2025-26 during H2: 2025-26
III. Going forward, the outlook is premised on a Exchange rate ₹ 86/US$ during ₹ 88/US$ during H2:
set of baseline assumptions. First, the baseline 2025-26 2025-26
assumption for crude oil prices (Indian basket) is Monsoon Normal for 2025-26 Normal for 2026-27
retained at US$ 70 per barrel for the second half of Global growth 3.1 per cent in 2025 3.0 per cent in 2025
3.0 per cent in 2026 3.1 per cent in 2026
2025-26 (Table I.2). International crude oil prices fell
Fiscal deficit To remain within BE To remain within BE
sharply in April due to demand concerns stemming
(Per cent of GDP) 2025-26 2025-26
from growth-disruptive tariff announcements, and Centre: 4.4 Centre: 4.4
continued its downward trajectory in May as supply Combined: 7.1 Combined: 7.4
outpaced demand, particularly from Organization Domestic macroeconomic/ No major change GST rationalisation
structural policies during
of the Petroleum Exporting Countries plus (OPEC+)
the forecast period
economies. In June, however, prices surged
Notes: 1. The Indian basket of crude oil represents a derived numeraire
intermittently as escalating tensions between Russia comprising sour grade (Oman and Dubai average) and sweet
and Ukraine, and intensifying conflict between Israel grade (Brent) crude oil.
2. The exchange rate path assumed here is for the purpose of
and Iran, heightened the risk premia amidst fears
generating the baseline projections and does not indicate any
of supply chain disruptions. Since July, crude prices ‘view’ on the level of the exchange rate. The Reserve Bank is
have resumed downward trend, supported by easing guided by the objective of containing excess volatility in the
foreign exchange market and not by any specific level of and/or
geopolitical tensions and improving fundamentals
band around the exchange rate.
(Chart I.1a). The consistent rise in crude oil inventory 3. BE: Budget estimates.
levels since Q3:2024, and their sustained elevation 4. Combined fiscal deficit refers to that of the Centre and States
taken together.
through 2025, reflects underlying positive supply-
Sources: RBI estimates; Budget documents; and the International
side developments including increased output from Monetary Fund (IMF).
Chart I.1: Crude Oil Prices and Exchange Rate Dynamics
a. Brent Prices b. World Oil Production, c. India's Exchange Rate
(US$ per barrel) Consumption and Inventory (INR/USD)
95
(Million barrels per day)
90 107 2.4
2
85
104 1.6
80
1.2
75
101 0.8
70 0.4
65 98 0
60 -0.4
95 -0.8
Q1Q2Q3Q4Q1Q2Q3Q4Q1Q2Q3Q4
2023 2024 2025
Spot price
Futures - September 26, 2025 Production Consumption
Futures - March 31, 2025 Inventory (RHS)
4
32-naJ 32-luJ 42-naJ 42-luJ 52-naJ 52-luJ 62-naJ 62-luJ
84
85
86
87
88
89
5202-10-10 5202-10-82 5202-20-42 5202-30-32 5202-40-91 5202-50-61 5202-60-21 5202-70-90 5202-80-50 5202-90-10 5202-90-62
Notes: 1. In Chart I.1b, shaded area represents projections.
2. In Chart I.1c, exchange rate series has been plotted in an inverted scale.
Sources: Bloomberg; US Energy Information Administration (EIA); and Petroleum Planning & Analysis Cell.Chapter I Macroeconomic Outlook
OPEC+ countries3 (Chart I.1b). Considering the average of 3.7 per cent (Chart I.2). The slowdown is
downward shift in the oil futures curve since the broad-based, affecting both AEs and emerging market
April 2025 MPR, along with projections of higher and developing economies (EMDEs). Growth in AEs
production and continued inventory build-up, the is expected to decline to 1.5 per cent in 2025 from
supply-demand outlook for crude oil remains broadly 1.8 per cent in 2024, while EMDEs are projected to
favourable. Upside risks, however, persist due to grow at 4.1 per cent in 2025, marginally lower than 4.3
heightened geopolitical uncertainty. per cent in 2024. In its Economic Outlook (September
Second, in view of ongoing uncertainty surrounding 2025), the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and
the US dollar and the volatility in global capital flows, Development (OECD) also anticipates a slowdown,
the baseline assumption for the exchange rate has despite a marginal upwards revision for 2025. Global
been increased to ₹88 per US dollar for the second GDP growth is projected to decelerate from 3.3 per
half of 2025-26, from ₹86 per US dollar in the April cent in 2024, to 3.2 per cent in 2025 and 2.9 per cent
2025 MPR. The Indian rupee appreciated by over 1 in 2026, as front-loading ceases and higher tariff rates
per cent (month-on-month [m-o-m]) in April 2025, in and still-high policy uncertainty dampen investment
line with other emerging market currencies, mirroring and trade. World trade volume (goods and services),
the weakness of the US dollar amidst rising economic as projected by the IMF, is also expected to lose
uncertainty in the US (Chart I.1c). Since May and up momentum, with growth slowing from 3.5 per cent
to the first half of July, the rupee remained largely in 2024 to 2.6 per cent in 2025 and further to 1.9 per
stable, trading around ₹85 per US dollar, despite cent in 2026. This is because the near-term boost from
elevated trade tensions and geopolitical risks. From
front-loading of trade flows is expected to wane in the
mid-July onwards, the rupee exhibited depreciating
rest of 2025. Global inflation is projected to ease, with
bias, moving within a range of ₹85.8-₹88.76. This
movement was driven by portfolio outflows, increase Chart I.2: IMF and OECD projections for
Growth and Inflation
in US tariff rates on Indian exports, and narrowing
(Per cent)
interest rate differentials. Nevertheless, India's 6.2
6.0 5.6
strong macroeconomic fundamentals and growth
5.0
prospects continue to provide underlying support to
4.2
the currency. Overall, in H1:2025-26, the Indian rupee 4.0 3.3
3.03.1
3.33.2
2.9
3.6 3.4
2.9
exhibited two-way movement, hovering close to ₹86.4 3.0
per US dollar, on average, with volatility lower than
2.0
that of most other emerging market economy (EME)
1.0
currencies.4
0.0
Third, according to the International Monetary Fund IMF OECD IMF OECD
-1.0
GDP Inflation
(IMF), the global economy is projected to grow at
2024 2025 2026
3.0 per cent in 2025 and 3.1 per cent in 2026. These
Note: OECD inflation projections are for G-20 countries.
projections are below the estimated outcome of 3.3
Sources: World Economic Outlook July 2025 Update, IMF; and Economic Outlook
September 2025, OECD.
per cent in 2024 and the pre-pandemic historical
3 On August 3, OPEC+ members again agreed to accelerate their scheduled production increases. The 2.2 million barrels per day (b/d) of production cuts
announced in November 2023 and initially scheduled to be fully unwound by September 2026 will now be fully unwound by September 2025. Also, on
September 7, OPEC+ announced that it plans to raise production by 137 thousand b/d in October 2025.
4 Indian rupee was less volatile, calculated via standard deviation, than MSCI EME currency index during H1:2025-26.
55headline inflation expected at 4.2 per cent in 2025 and urban households moderated by 20 bps to 8.1 per cent
3.6 per cent in 2026, supported by softening energy and 30 bps to 8.7 per cent, respectively. The shares of
prices and subdued demand conditions. Inflation respondents anticipating a rise in inflation declined
dynamics are, however, expected to diverge across for the near term and year ahead compared to the
economies. In the US, tariffs are likely to function previous round (Chart I.3a). Urban households’ long-
as a supply-side shock, gradually passing through term expectations on inflation have been sequentially
to consumer prices and pushing inflation higher in declining for the past four survey rounds. Additionally,
the latter half of 2025. In contrast, higher tariffs are as per the Reserve Bank’s recent bi-monthly Rural
expected to dampen export demand and thereby exert Consumer Confidence Survey (RCCS)6, the current
downward pressure on inflation in other regions.
perception of inflation (vis-à-vis a year ago) of the
I.2 The Outlook for Inflation rural and semi-urban households inched up by 10
bps to 5.9 per cent in September 2025 as compared
In H1:2025-26 (up to August), headline inflation has
with the previous round. However, their year
remained well below 4 per cent driven by benign
ahead inflation expectations declined by 30 bps to
food prices and favourable base effects. However, it
7.6 per cent (Chart I.3b). Rural households’ long
increased to 2.1 per cent in the month of August as
term expectations of inflation has been sequentially
compared to 1.6 per cent in July 2025 which is a first
declining for the past five rounds of survey.
increase recorded after nine consecutive months of
decline. In the September 2025 round of the Reserve Manufacturing firms polled in the July-September
Bank’s bi-monthly households survey5, the three 2025 round of the Reserve Bank’s quarterly
months and one year ahead inflation expectations of industrial outlook survey expect pressures from
Chart I.3: Inflation Expectations of Households
a. Urban Households b. Rural Households
[In(cid:28)lation rate (Per cent), left scale; (Per cent)
Proportion of respondents (Per cent), right scale]
13 80
12
70
11
10 60
9 50
8
7 40
6 30 5
4 20
Sources: Inflation Expectations Survey of Households; and Rural Consumer Confidence Survey of Households, RBI.
5 The Reserve Bank’s inflation expectations survey of households is being conducted in 19 cities since March 2021 (18 cities in the previous rounds) and
the results of the September 2025 round are based on responses from 6,082 households.
6 The Reserve Bank’s rural consumer confidence survey is being conducted across all Indian states and three major UTs since July 2024 and the results of
the September 2025 round are based on responses from 8,848 respondents.
6
22-yaM 22-luJ 22-peS 22-voN 32-naJ 32-raM 32-yaM 32-luJ 32-peS 32-voN 42-naJ 42-raM 42-yaM 42-luJ 42-peS 42-voN 52-naJ 52-raM 52-yaM 52-luJ 52-peS
11
10
9
8 7.6
7
5.9 6
5
4
Three months ahead (Median)
One year ahead (Median)
Three months ahead price increase more than the current rate (RHS)
One year ahead price increase more than the current rate (RHS)
32-peS 32-voN 42-naJ 42-raM 42-yaM 42-luJ 42-peS 42-voN 52-naJ 52-raM 52-yaM 52-luJ 52-peS
Current Perception (Median)
One year ahead Expectation (Median)Chapter I Macroeconomic Outlook
cost of raw materials to ease in Q3:2025-26. The at 4.2 per cent during Q2:2025-26, thereafter, remain
growth in selling prices is expected to be higher around 4.0 per cent till Q4 and further soften to 3.8-
vis-à-vis the previous quarter (Chart 1.4a).7 Services 3.9 per cent in H1:2026-27.
firms expect stable input cost pressures but higher
Long-run inflation expectations of professional
growth in selling prices in Q3, while firms from
forecasters – measured by their five and ten years
infrastructure sector anticipate easing of cost pressures ahead expectations – have eased to 4.0 per cent in the
and expect lower growth in selling prices. (Chart 1.4b current round (Chart 1.5b).
and 1.4c).8 In the Purchasing Managers’ Index (PMI)
Looking ahead, the inflation outlook will depend upon
surveys for August 2025, services firms reported a
several factors, both global and domestic. Assuming a
substantial increase in input and output prices vis-
normal monsoon and a sustained reduction in food
à-vis the previous month due to higher labour costs
inflation, the quarterly CPI inflation forecasts for
and robust demand conditions, while manufacturing
2025-26 have been adjusted downward in RBI staff
firms reported only a marginal increase in both prices.
projections. Nevertheless, inflation is expected to rise
Professional forecasters surveyed by the Reserve Bank from the final quarter of this financial year, yet the
in September 2025 forecasted CPI inflation to decrease recent GST rationalization among other favourable
from 2.7 per cent in Q1:2025-26 to 1.9-2.0 per cent factors will help keep overall inflation low during
2025-26. While the uncertainties surrounding tariffs
in Q2 and Q3. It is expected to increase gradually
continue to remain, the impact of previous policy rate
to 3.6 per cent in Q4 and further to 4.2 per cent in
reductions are still unfolding.
H1:2026-27 (Chart I.5a and Table I.3).9 Core inflation
(i.e., CPI excluding food and beverages, pan, tobacco Considering the initial conditions, signals from
and intoxicants, and fuel and light) is expected to be forward-looking surveys and estimates from time-
Chart I.4: Expectations about Cost of Raw Materials/Inputs and Selling Prices
a. Manufacturing Firms b. Services Firms c. Infrastructure Firms
[Net response (Per cent)] [Net response (Per cent)] [Net response (Per cent)]
80
60
40
24.1
20
0
-20
-40 -45.6
-60
-80
-100
Note: Net response is the difference between the share of respondents reporting optimism and those reporting pessimism. The range is -100 to 100. A positive/ negative
value of net response is considered as optimistic/pessimistic from the viewpoint of respondent firms. Therefore, higher positive values of selling prices indicate increase
in output prices while lower values for the cost of raw materials/cost of inputs indicate higher input price pressures and vice versa.
Sources: Industrial Outlook Survey and Services and Infrastructure Outlook Survey, RBI.
7 The results of the July-September 2025 round of the industrial outlook survey are based on responses from 1,106 companies.
8 Based on 614 services companies and 92 infrastructure firms polled in the July-September 2025 round of the services and infrastructure outlook survey.
9 Forty-eight panellists participated in the September 2025 round of the Reserve Bank’s Survey of Professional Forecasters.
77
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q
80
60 45.8
40
20
0
-20
-40
-60 -53.5
-80
-100
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Cost of raw materials
Selling price
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q
80
60
40
43.6
20
0
-20
-40
-57.8
-60
-80
-100
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Cost of inputs
Selling price
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Cost of inputs
Selling priceChart I.5: Inflation Expectations of Professional Forecasters
a. Short-run* b. Long-run
(Per cent) (Per cent)
8 6
7
6
5
5
4.2 4.2
4 3.6
4
3
1.9 2.0
2
1 3
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26 2026-27
Actual Median projection Survey Round
*: Four quarters ahead expectations in September 2025. Five years ahead Ten years ahead
Sources: Survey of Professional Forecasters, RBI; and National Statistics Office.
Table I.3: Projections - Reserve Bank and
Professional Forecasters
(Per cent)
2025-26 2026-27
Reserve Bank’s Baseline Projections
Inflation 2.6 4.5
Real GDP growth 6.8 6.6
Median Projections of Professional Forecasters
Inflation, Q4 (y-o-y) 3.6 -
Real GDP growth 6.7 6.5
Gross domestic saving (per cent of GNDI) 30.0 30.4
Gross capital formation (per cent of GDP) 32.8 33.0
Credit growth of scheduled commercial banks 11.0 11.5
Combined gross fiscal deficit (per cent of GDP) 7.4 7.1
Central government gross fiscal deficit (per cent
4.4 4.2
of GDP)
Repo rate (end-period) 5.25 -
Yield on 91-days treasury bills (end-period) 5.5 6.0
Yield on 10-year central government securities
6.4 6.5
(end-period)
Overall balance of payments (US$ billion) 7.6 20.0
Merchandise exports growth 0.2 5.0
Merchandise imports growth 2.5 6.0
Current account balance (per cent of GDP) -0.9 -0.9
Note: GNDI: Gross National Disposable Income.
Source: RBI staff estimates; and Survey of Professional Forecasters
(September 2025).
8
61-peS 71-raM 71-peS 81-raM 81-peS 91-raM 91-peS 02-raM 02-peS 12-raM 12-peS 22-raM 22-peS 32-raM 32-peS 42-raM 42-peS 52-raM 52-peS
series and structural models10, CPI inflation is
projected to average 2.6 per cent in 2025-26 with 1.8
per cent in both Q2 and Q3 and 4.0 per cent in Q4,
with risks evenly balanced (Chart I.6 and Table 1.3).
The 50 per cent and the 70 per cent confidence
intervals for headline inflation in Q4:2025-26 are
Chart I.6. Projection of CPI Inflation (y-o-y)
(Per cent)
10
8
6
4
2
0
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26 2026-27
50 per cent CI 70 per cent CI 90 per cent CI
CI-Confidence Interval
Note: The fan chart depicts uncertainty around the baseline projection path. The
baseline projections are conditioned upon the assumptions set out in Table I.2. The
thick red shaded area represents 50 per cent confidence interval, implying that there is
50 per cent probability that the actual outcome will be within the range given by the
thick red shaded area. Likewise, for 70 per cent and 90 per cent confidence intervals,
there is 70 per cent and 90 per cent probability, respectively, that the actual outcomes
will be in the range represented by the respective shaded areas.(cid:143)
Source: RBI staff estimates.
10 Joice John, Deepak Kumar, Asish Thomas George, Pratik Mitra, Muneesh Kapur and Michael Debabrata Patra (2023), “A Recalibrated Quarterly Projection
Model (QPM 2.0) for India”, Reserve Bank of India Bulletin, February, Volume LXXVII(2), pp.59-77.Chapter I Macroeconomic Outlook
3.0-5.0 per cent and 2.4-5.6 per cent, respectively. I.3 Growth Outlook
For 2026-27, assuming a normal monsoon, and no
Domestic economic activity remains resilient,
further exogenous or policy shocks, structural model
supported by strong private consumption, government
estimates indicate that inflation will average 4.5 per
consumption and fixed investment. An above-normal
cent with 4.5 per cent in both Q1 and Q2, 5.1 per cent
southwest monsoon, congenial financial conditions,
in Q3 and 3.9 per cent in Q4. The 50 per cent and the
rising capacity utilisation, the government’s continued
70 per cent confidence intervals for headline inflation
thrust on capital expenditure, and GST 2.0 reforms
in Q4:2026-27 are 2.4-5.3 per cent and 1.6-6.1 per cent,
augured well for the growth outlook. Improving
respectively.
credit conditions are also likely to spur aggregate
The baseline forecasts are subject to several upside
demand conditions in the near-term (Box I.1).
and downside risks. The upside risks emanate from
However, outlook remains uncertain due to external
supply disruptions caused by weather-related shocks
demand uncertainty driven by tariffs; prolonged
and prolonged geopolitical conflicts. The downside
geopolitical tensions; and volatility in global financial
risks could emanate from an early resolution of
markets.
geopolitical conflicts and tariff related uncertainties;
global growth moderation; softening commodity Turning to the key messages from forward-looking
prices; and improvement in supply conditions. surveys, bi-monthly consumer confidence (the
Box I.1: The Effect of Credit Conditions on Monetary Policy
The interest rate channel is central to the conduct of higher index indicating tighter credit supply. This index
monetary policy under inflation targeting: the central is estimated using India’s credit-to-GDP gap series of the
bank influences the price of credit (interest rates) through Bank for International Settlements (BIS), controlling for
its control over the price of bank reserves. This, ceteris aggregate demand conditions and the effects of monetary
paribus, affects the quantity of lending and thereby policy. Credit supply conditions eased substantively in
demand conditions in the economy. This is considered the response to counter the economic fallout of the Covid-19
primary channel of macroeconomic stabilization through pandemic, but tightened significantly thereafter to control
monetary policy. Yet, this textbook narrative and its the inflationary fallout of the Russia-Ukraine conflict.
underlying assumptions simplify the more sophisticated Subsequently, credit supply conditions have eased. In this
role played by credit-issuing financial institutions in context, the size of recent deviation of the credit supply
modern monetary economies. index from its average value is used here to simulate the
macroeconomic impact of shocks to credit supply in the
Changes in funding costs are an important determinant
Indian economy using the Quarterly Projection Model
of portfolio management by credit-issuing financial
(QPM 2.0).
institutions, with loan creation on the asset side being
the key indicator of importance from a monetary policy Chart I.1.1.b shows the baseline path and probability
perspective. However, credit supply is also influenced distribution of credit conditions of an expansionary
by macroeconomic outlook, financial stability concerns, shock to credit supply (a negative shock indicates looser
regulatory requirements, institutional objectives, and credit conditions) as observed in the recent period with
broader uncertainties. Thus, the resulting financial an assumption of no further shocks of any kind to the
strategies can generate shifts in credit supply, at times economy. In the baseline case, buoyant credit supply
autonomous of monetary policy. These shifts nonetheless may spur aggregate demand conditions in the near-term
have implications for monetary policy. (Chart I.1.1.c), with quantity effects moderating in the
medium-term. However, such a shock may push up core
Chart I.1.1.a presents an index of the supply of credit in
the Indian economy in the post-Covid19 period, with a (Contd.)
99Chart I.1.1: Impact of Credit Conditions
a. An Index of Credit Supply in the Recent Period
Note: The credit supply index here has been derived econometrically by regressing the credit-to-gdp gap on output gap with appropriate leads and lags. The residual series has been
smoothened using a state-space model with stochastic volatility framework, and is an index of credit supply. The dotted lines represent one standard deviation dispersion. Higher index
indicates tighter credit supply.
b. Effect of Changes in Credit Supply on c. Effect of Changes in Credit Conditions on
Aggregate Credit Conditions Aggregate Demand
Note: higher index indicates tighter credit conditions. The dark line is the baseline case of expansionary
shock to credit supply with the dispersion representing variance conditional on shock size. The
subsequent path is under the assumption of no further macroeconomic shocks of any kind.
d. Effect of Changes in Credit Conditions on e. Effect of Changes in Credit Conditions on
Headline Inflation the Projected Policy Rate Path
and therefore headline inflation (Chart I.1.1.d), with price Reference:
rigidities leading to prolonged adjustment. Consequently, Joice John, Deepak Kumar, Asish Thomas George, Pratik
the projected policy rate path may harden to counter- Mitra, Muneesh Kapur and Michael Debabrata Patra
cyclically stabilise the economy (Chart I.1.1.e). The spread (2023), “A Recalibrated Quarterly Projection Model (QPM
of the fan charts indicate that the probability distribution 2.0) for India”, Reserve Bank of India Bulletin, February,
in these macroeconomic variables is conditional upon the Volume LXXVII(2), pp.59-77.
assumption of balanced risks and the change in credit
conditions.
10Chapter I Macroeconomic Outlook
current situation index) for both urban11 and rural12 Recent surveys by other agencies indicate a mixed
households improved marginally in September 2025 picture on business expectations relative to the
vis-à-vis the previous round on account of improved previous round (Table I.4). In the PMI surveys for
sentiments across most of the survey parameters. August 2025, both manufacturing and services firms
Although it remains in the pessimistic zone for urban reported improvements in a year ahead sentiment,
households, it is in the optimistic zone for rural driven by expectations of stronger demand.
households.
Professional forecasters polled in September 2025
Consumers’ optimism for the year ahead, measured by round of the Reserve Bank’s survey projected real GDP
the future expectations index, strengthened further growth at 6.8 per cent during Q2:2025-26. Growth is
for both urban and rural households, remaining in expected around 6.1-6.5 per cent during Q3:2025-26
optimistic territory (Chart I.7). to Q2:2026-27 (Chart I.9).
In the Reserve Bank’s quarterly industrial outlook Real GDP growth was higher at 7.8 per cent in Q1:2025-
survey of July-September 2025, manufacturing firms 26 as compared with 7.4 per cent in Q4:2024-25,
continued to hold an optimistic business outlook
mainly driven by robust fixed investment, private and
(BAI/BEI)13 during Q3:2025-26 (Chart I.8a). The
Government consumption. Taking into account the
services and infrastructure companies also continue baseline assumptions, survey indicators and model
to remain optimistic on overall business situation in forecasts, real GDP growth is expected at 6.8 per cent
Q3:2025-26 (Charts I.8b and I.8c). in 2025-26 with 7.0 per cent in Q2; 6.4 per cent in Q3;
Chart I.7: Consumer Confidence
a. Urban Households b. Rural Households
(Index) (Index)
130 125 127.9
120
110
100
96.9
90
100.9
80
70
60
50
40
Sources: Urban Consumer Confidence Survey; and Rural Consumer Confidence Survey, RBI.
11 The Reserve Bank’s urban consumer confidence survey is being conducted in 19 cities since March 2021 (13 cities in the previous rounds) and the results
of the September 2025 round are based on responses from 6,068 respondents.
12 The Reserve Bank’s rural consumer confidence survey is being conducted across all Indian states and three major UTs since July 2024 and the results of
the September 2025 round are based on responses from 8,848 respondents.
13 Business Assessment Index (BAI)/Business Expectations Index (BEI) gives a snapshot of demand conditions in the manufacturing sector by combining
nine parameters – (i) overall business situation, (ii) production, (iii) order books, (iv) inventory of raw material, (v) inventory of finished goods, (vi) profit
margin, (vii) employment, (viii) exports and (ix) capacity utilisation. A value above 100 indicates an expansion of the overall business activity and value
below 100 indicates contraction.
1111
22-yaM 22-luJ 22-peS 22-voN 32-naJ 32-raM 32-yaM 32-luJ 32-peS 32-voN 42-naJ 42-raM 42-yaM 42-luJ 42-peS 42-voN 52-naJ 52-raM 52-yaM 52-luJ 52-peS
130
120
110
100
90
80
32-peS 32-voN 42-naJ 42-raM 42-yaM 42-luJ 42-peS 42-voN 52-naJ 52-raM 52-yaM 52-luJ 52-peS
Current Situation Index Future Expectations Index Current Situation Index Future Expectations IndexChart I.8: Business Assessment and Expectations
a. Manufacturing Firms b. Services Firms c. Infrastructure Firms
(Index) [Net Response on Overall Business Situation (Per cent)] [Net Response on Overall Business Situation (Per cent)]
140
130
126.3
120
110 110.6
100
Sources: Industrial Outlook Survey; and Services and Infratructure Outlook Survey, RBI.
and 6.2 per cent in Q4 – and risks evenly balanced further escalation in geopolitical tensions; volatility
around this baseline path (Chart I.10 and Table I.3). in global financial markets; frequent weather-related
Assuming a normal monsoon and no major exogenous disturbances; and supply chain disruptions pose
or policy shocks, structural model estimates for 2026- downside risks to the baseline growth path.
27 indicate real GDP growth at 6.6 per cent, with Q1 at
I.4 Balance of Risks
6.4 per cent, Q2 at 6.6 per cent, Q3 at 6.8 per cent and
The baseline projections of growth and inflation are
Q4 at 6.5 per cent.
conditional on assumptions relating to key domestic
There are upside and downside risks to this baseline
and global macroeconomic variables that are set out
growth path. The upside risks emanate from revival
in private investment; early resolution of global
trade related issues; and sustained softening of
global commodity prices. On the contrary, increasing
trade fragmentation due to protectionist policies;
Table I.4: Business Expectations Surveys
NCAER Dun and Bradstreet
Business Composite
Item Confidence Business
Index Optimism Index
(August 2025) (July 2025)
Current level of the index 149.4 117.5
Index as per previous survey 139.3 120.2
% change (q-o-q) sequential 7.3 -2.3
% change (y-o-y) -0.3 4.8
Notes: 1. NCAER: National Council of Applied Economic Research.
2. Dun and Bradstreet Composite Business Optimism Index is
for Q2:2025-26 and NCAER Business Confidence Index is for
Q1:2025:26.
Sources: NCAER and Dun & Bradstreet Information Services India Pvt. Ltd.
12
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q
80
73.2
60
40 37.2
20
0
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Assessment Expectations Assessment Expectations Assessment Expectations
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q
80
67.8
60
40
35.2
20
0
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Chart I.9: Professional Forecasters' Projection of
Real GDP Growth
(Per cent)
14
12
10
8
6.8 6.4 6.2 6.1
6.5
6
4
2
0
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26 2026-27
Actual Median projection
Sources: Survey of Professional Forecasters, RBI; and National Statistics Office.Chapter I Macroeconomic Outlook
rates elevated despite weak growth. Global economic
Chart I.10: Projection of Growth in
Real GDP (y-o-y) outlook is also subject to headwinds from adverse
(Per cent) weather shocks and technological disruptions.
12
Given this backdrop, if global growth turns out to
be 100 bps below the baseline, domestic growth and
8
inflation could be lower by around 30 bps and 15
4 bps, respectively. On the upside, a more constructive
outcome from trade negotiations resulting in reduced
0
tariffs and a stable framework could bolster global
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26 2026-27
growth. Moreover, growth could improve if major
50 per cent CI 70 per cent CI 90 per cent CI
economies work together on policies that stabilise
prices and strengthen fiscal position, and push
Note: The fan chart depicts uncertainty around the baseline projection path. The
baseline projections are conditioned upon the assumptions set out in Table I.2. The
forward structural reforms. On the positive side,
thick green shaded area represents 50 per cent confidence interval, implying that there
is 50 per cent probability that the actual outcome will be within the range given by the
thick green shaded area. Likewise, for 70 per cent and 90 per cent confidence intervals, if global growth is higher by 50 bps relative to the
there is 70 per cent and 90 per cent probability, respectively, (cid:31)that the actual outcomes
will be in the range represented by the respective shaded areas.(cid:31) baseline, domestic growth and inflation could turn out
Source: RBI staff estimates.
to be higher by around 15 bps and 7 bps, respectively
in Table 1.2. These baseline assumptions are subject (Charts I.11a and I.12a).
to uncertainties emanating from US trade policies,
(ii) International Crude Oil Prices
protracted geopolitical hostilities, volatility in global
financial markets and adverse weather shocks. Against Global crude oil prices exhibited a declining trend
this backdrop, this section explores the balance of with Brent crude falling from a high of US$ 77 per
risks around the baseline projections of inflation and barrel in early-April 2025 to US$ 68 per barrel during
growth under plausible alternative scenarios. September 2025. Protracted geopolitical tensions
resulting in reduced supply, sanctions on major oil
(i) Global Growth Uncertainties
producing countries, supply shortages due to lower
Global economic activity remained steady in H1:2025,
investment in new oil projects owing to energy
but the driver of growth was mainly the frontloading
transitions and faster than expected recovery in
of exports. The economic landscape world-wide
global demand may put upward pressure on crude oil
remains in flux amidst shifting trade pattern and
prices. In this scenario, if crude oil prices are higher
persisting uncertainty about US trade policies with
by 10 per cent than the baseline, and assuming full
key partners, posing considerable downside risks to
pass-through to domestic product prices, inflation
global growth prospects. Additionally, heightened
could turn out to be higher by 30 bps and growth may
geopolitical tensions could further disrupt global
be lower by around 15 bps. Conversely, weak global
supply chains and exacerbate upward pressure on
demand conditions as discussed above, unwinding of
commodity prices. Wider fiscal imbalances or a shift
towards greater risk aversion could push up long-term production cuts by OPEC+ countries given effective
interest rates and tighten global financial conditions. spare capacity in major producing countries, and
Along with concerns on geo-economic fragmentations, quicker resolution of geopolitical conflicts may
such developments may spark volatility in global dampen crude oil prices. If crude oil prices are lower
financial markets with spillover effects in emerging by 10 per cent relative to the baseline, inflation could
market economies (EMEs). The persistent inflation be lower by around 30 bps and boosting GDP growth
pressures could prompt major central banks to keep by 15 bps (Charts I.11a and I.12a).
1133
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q
CI-Confidence IntervalChart I.11: Impact of Risk Scenarios on the Baseline Inflation Path
a. Crude Oil Prices and Global Demand Shocks b. Exchange Rate and Food Price Shocks
(Per cent) (Per cent)
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
Higher crude price Lower crude price
Global growth slowdown Global growth recovery
Baseline
Sources: RBI staff estimates.
(iii) Exchange Rate exacerbated by growing risk aversion on EMEs among
global investors. Strengthening of the US dollar may
Notwithstanding intermittent phases of appreciation,
also lower the attractiveness of EME assets. Higher
the Indian Rupee (INR) depreciated vis-à-vis the US
international crude oil prices due to sanctions and
dollar during April-September 2025, largely owing
persisting geopolitical tensions may also contribute
to global trade uncertainties and capital outflows.
Going ahead, volatility in global financial markets to weakening of the INR. In this scenario, if INR
owing to slowing global trade and demand may exert depreciates by 5 per cent over the baseline, inflation
downward pressure on the currency. This may be could be higher by around 35 bps and GDP growth
14
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
2024-25 2025-26 2026-27
Exchange rate depreciation Exchange rate appreciation
Higher food inflation Lower food inflation
Baseline
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q
2024-25 2025-26 2026-27
Chart I.12: Impact of Risk Scenarios on the Baseline Growth Path
a. Crude Oil Prices and Global Demand Shocks b. Exchange Rate and Food Price Shock
(Per cent) (Per cent)
9.0 9.0
8.0 8.0
7.0 7.0
6.0 6.0
5.0 5.0
4.0 4.0
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
2024-25 2025-26 2026-27 2024-25 2025-26 2026-27
Higher crude price Lower crude price Exchange rate depreciation Exchange rate appreciation
Global growth recovery Global growth slowdown Higher food inflation Lower food inflation
Baseline Baseline
Sources: RBI staff estimates.Chapter I Macroeconomic Outlook
may benefit by around 25 bps through the exports to adverse weather events may increase food prices.
channel in the short term. On the other hand, the These circumstances may result in higher headline
Indian rupee has been the least volatile among EMDE inflation by 50 bps vis-à-vis the baseline (Charts
currencies, drawing confidence from stable inflation I.11b and I.12b).
and resilient growth outlook. Going ahead, these
I.5 Conclusion
positive sentiments along with greater than expected
Domestic economic activity remains resilient and
monetary policy accommodation by the major central
is expected to maintain momentum, supported by
banks and improved trade outlook may attract capital
domestic drivers, despite weak external demand.
inflows, lending support to the INR. In this scenario,
The GST 2.0 reforms are expected to boost private
an appreciation of 5 per cent of the INR relative to the
consumption and domestic demand. Rising capacity
baseline would lead to a moderation in inflation and
utilisation, strong corporate and bank balance sheets,
GDP growth by around 35 bps and 25 bps, respectively
and favourable financial conditions are likely to
(Charts I.11b and I.12b).
further support investment and growth. India’s
(iv) Food Inflation recent credit rating upgrades reflect growing global
confidence in the country’s economic resilience
Food prices turned deflationary in recent months due
and growth prospects. Headline inflation has seen
to a sharp fall in vegetable prices owing to subdued
significant moderation during H1:2025-26 (up to
seasonal uptick, supported by government’s effective
August), mainly due to a sharp correction in food
supply side measures, and favourable base effect. Soft
prices. Inflation expectations of households and
prices prevailed across food categories, with pulses
professional forecasters have also eased. Inflation is
and spices continuing to remain in deflation, while
expected to remain broadly aligned with the target,
cereal inflation exhibited a pronounced moderation.
despite edging up from Q4:2025-26 as favourable base
The strong monsoon and the resultant robust kharif
effects wane and demand strengthens on the back of
sowing, large buffer stocks, and improved prospects
policy action. Core inflation is also expected to remain
for rabi crops from adequate reservoir levels could keep contained. Nonetheless, risks from adverse weather
pressures on food inflation muted. In such a scenario, events, evolving tariff actions, and volatile global
headline inflation may moderate by around 50 bps financial markets pose headwinds to growth and
relative to the baseline. On the other hand, higher inflation. However, India’s robust macroeconomic
than expected momentum in the prices of perishable fundamentals, along with a strong external position,
food items and lower agricultural production owing provide resilience against such shocks.
1155Monetary Policy Report October 2025
II. Prices and Costs
Headline CPI inflation continued on a declining trajectory during H1:2025-26, except for the pick-up in
August. The decline in inflation was driven by the food group as favourable weather conditions and increase in
production augmented supply. Core inflation remained rangebound around 4 per cent despite rising gold prices
exerting significant upside pressures. Overall cost conditions remained benign, with industrial and farm input
cost pressures staying soft and wage pressures remaining muted.
II.1 Introduction core group (CPI excluding food and fuel)3 registered a
Headline consumer price index (CPI) inflation1 moderate increase during this period.
declined for nine consecutive months to reach an
In terms of monthly trajectory of headline CPI during
8-year low of 1.6 per cent in July 2025 before edging
2025-26, a positive momentum4 was observed across
up to 2.1 per cent in August (Chart II.1). The decline
successive months during April-August. Up to July,
in inflation was driven by the food group, as its
favourable base effects, however, offset its impact,
contribution declined from a large positive to zero
leading to a moderation in y-o-y inflation (Chart II.3).
between October 20242 and August 2025 (Chart II.2).
The contribution of the fuel group turned marginally In the absence of any base effects, y-o-y inflation
positive from marginally negative while that of the recorded an increase in August.5
Chart II.1: CPI Inflation Chart II.2: Contributors to Decline in
Headline Inflation
(Y-o-y, per cent)
14 (Percentage points)
12 7
6.2 per cent
10
6
8
5
6
4 4.2 4 4.6
2.4
2 2.1
3
0 0.0 2.1 per cent
0.2
-2 2
-4
1 1.7 1.9
-6
0
-0.1
-1
October 2024 (Recent high) August 2025
Food and beverages Fuel and light CPI excluding food and fuel
Sources: National Statistical Office (NSO); and RBI staff estimates. Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
1 Headline inflation is measured by year-on-year (y-o-y) changes in the all-India consumer price index (CPI) published by the National Statistical
Office (NSO), Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, Government of India.
2 CPI inflation recorded an intra-year peak of 6.2 per cent in October 2024.
3 Core group CPI, i.e., CPI excluding food and fuel is worked out by eliminating the groups ‘food and beverages’ and ‘fuel and light’ from the headline CPI.
4 A change in CPI year-on-year (y-o-y) inflation between any two months is the difference between the current month-on-month (m-o-m) change in the
price index (momentum) and the m-o-m change in the price index 12 months earlier (base effect). For more details, see Box I.1 of the MPR, September 2014.
5 Headline CPI remained unchanged between July and August 2024, leading to no base effect for August 2025.
16
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Tolerance band Headline
Food and beverages Fuel and light
Target CPI excluding food and fuelChapter II Prices and Costs
Chart II.3: Change in CPI Headline Inflation:
Momentum and Base Effects
(Percentage points)
3
2
1
0.5
0.5
0
-1
-2
-3
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
The April 2025 MPR projected inflation at 3.8 per cent in October 2024 to (-) 0.8 per cent (y-o-y) in July 2025.
in Q4:2024-25 and 3.6 per cent in Q1:2025-26 (Chart The decline in food inflation for nine consecutive
II.4).6 The actual outcomes turned out to be lower months up to July, a first in the current CPI series
than projections for Q1:2025-26 by 90 bps. Realised (CPI:2012=100), was the largest both in terms
inflation lower than projections was primarily on of magnitude and duration (Table II.1). This was
account of faster than expected as well as a more marked by two distinct phases. During November
protracted decline in food prices during the winter, 2024-April 2025, prices declined in absolute levels
which extended up to April, the longest (9 months) (negative momentum), which drove the overall
decline in CPI headline inflation. Since May,
and steepest (10.5 per cent) consecutive decline in
although food prices recorded a seasonal pick-
prices in the current CPI series. Thereafter, milder
up, large favourable base effects offset the muted
than usual summer temperatures dampened the
extent of price reversals during the summer months,
Table II.1: Major Episodes of Decline in
as reflected in below historical average price build-up
Food Inflation
leading to lower-than-expected realised inflation in
Period* Cumulative Decline No. of Months
Q1 and Q2:2025-26 so far.
(Percentage points)
II.2 Developments across Major Components of the Nov-2024 to July-2025 -10.5 9
Dec-2013 to Feb-2014 -8.5 3
CPI
Nov-2020 to Jan-2021 -7.4 3
CPI Food Group Aug-2014 to Nov-2014 -6.7 4
Aug-2016 to Jan-2017 -6.6 6
Food and beverages group7 witnessed a sharp decline
Note: *Includes episodes with more than 5 per cent cumulative decline.
in inflation from a peak of 9.7 per cent (y-o-y) Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
6 The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) Act, 1934 (amended in 2016) enjoins the RBI to set out deviations of actual inflation outcomes from projections, if any,
and explain the underlying reasons thereof.
7 With a weight of 45.9 per cent for food and beverages group in the overall CPI-Combined basket, developments in food inflation have a major impact
on the overall inflation trajectory.
1177
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Chart II.4: CPI Inflation: Projection versus Actual
(Y-o-y, per cent)
4.0 3.8 3.7
3.6
3.5
3.0 2.7
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
Q4:2024-25 Q1:2025-26
M-o-m change Base effect
Monthly change in y-o-y inflation (per cent) April 2025 MPR projection Actual
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart II.5: CPI Food Inflation
a. CPI Food and Beverages b. Price Build-up in CPI Food and Beverages
(Percentage points) (Per cent)
10
8
6
4
3.3
2
0
-2
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
positive momentum to keep y-o-y inflation on production, wholesale market arrivals, favourable
a declining trajectory (Chart II.5a). In August, a trade policies and proactive supply management, led
positive momentum and an unfavourable base effect the decline in food inflation. Notably, the absence of
together led to food prices coming out of deflation, extreme weather events till August restricted the extent
recording near-zero inflation. Overall, during 2025- of volatility typically associated with food inflation.
26 (up to August), the build-up in prices has been An analysis of food price cycles in India shows that
below both last year’s trend and historical average
there are considerable swings in food inflation, with
(Chart II.5b).
downturns being longer than upswings, while the
A combination of favourable supply-side factors, such amplitudes of upward movements are greater than
as comfortable stocks of foodgrains on higher domestic those of downward movements (Box II.1).
Box II.1: Sharp Rise and Slow Fade: Nature of Food Inflation Cycles in India
Food prices in India exhibit significant volatility while identified through estimating local peaks and troughs
witnessing periods of booms and slumps.8 A number by the following equations:
of studies have characterised the nature of food price
P max P k = 1, 2, ….,m, where m is set to 12
volatility in the Indian context, although very few have t,peak t k
covered on the nature of cycles in food price inflation in P = min( P± ), k=1, 2, ….,m, where m is set to 12
t,trough t k
India (Sekhar et al., 2018). Based on identified turning Based o =n the
(
lo±c )a ,l peaks and troughs, duration and
points using cycle dating literature (Bry and Boschan, amplitudes of phases (booms and slumps) and full
1971) and subsequent refinements (Cashin et al., 2002; cycles [peak-to-peak (PP) and trough-to-trough (TT)] are
World Bank, 2025), the nature of food inflation cycles marked off. Boom is defined as the duration in months
in India is examined for the period January 2012 to between trough to peak, while slump is the duration
June 2025. Turning points for food inflation cycles are in months between peak to trough. The full cycle PP is
(Contd.)
8 Boom refers to price spikes.
18
rpA yaM nuJ luJ guA peS tcO voN ceD naJ beF raM
0.6
0.3
0.0
2023-24 2025-26
M-o-m change Base effect Y-o-y inflation (per cent) 2024-25 Average: 2017-18 to 2022-23
42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
12.0
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0.0
-2.0
-4.0Chapter II Prices and Costs
defined as slump followed by boom, while a cycle TT Bank, 2025). Conversely, booms are often sharp but
is defined as boom followed by a slump. Amplitude is transient, as they are frequently induced by sudden
the magnitude of price movements during the phase of supply-side disruptions such as extreme weather events
boom and slump measured as log differences. or geopolitical shocks. Full cycles are characterised as
PP and TT, with an average duration of 40 months each.
Price Cycles and Turning Points
Booms have an average amplitude of 17 per cent, far
Since January 2012, food inflation in India has surpassing the slumps’ amplitude of 9 per cent (Chart
exhibited recurrent cycles, witnessing five troughs II.1.2b). The amplitudes of TT and PP are comparable
and four peaks (Chart II.1.1a). At any particular month, for full cycles, and the wide interquartile ranges signify
certain food sub-groups’ prices may be in a boom phase variable intensities of full cycles.
while others may be in a slump phase. A weighted
Cycle Characteristics across Food Sub-groups
share of sub-groups in slumps and booms reveals that,
Booms are characterised by a greater amplitude than
on average, 45 per cent were in a boom phase while
slumps across all sub-groups. Pulses and products,
55 per cent were in a slump phase in any given month
and vegetables have experienced a larger amplitude
(Chart II.1.1b). Over the sample period, however, this
and substantial variation. Slumps endure longer than
exhibited large variation, with the share of food sub-
booms across different food sub-groups, barring pulses
groups in the boom phase peaking at 86 per cent in July
and products, vegetables, spices, and fruits. Full cycle
2012, while the slump phase share surpassed 91 per
durations show that PP cycles across various food sub-
cent in May 2017 and June 2025.
groups exceed the duration of TT cycles.
Duration and Amplitude of Cycles
Overall, the nature of food price cycles shows that
Booms last an average of 18 months while slumps downturns typically surpass upswings in terms of
persist for 21 months (Chart II.1.2a). Factors such as duration, but the amplitudes are greater for upward vis-
productivity gains that lead to increased supply over à-vis downward movements. For most food sub-groups,
time, which in turn results in sustained low inflation downturns persist longer than upturns, barring pulses
could contribute to larger duration of slumps (World and products, fruits, spices and vegetables, which record
Chart II.1.1a. CPI Food and Beverages Inflation Chart II.1.1b. Weighted Share of Sub-groups
(Y-o-y, per cent) in Booms and Slumps
20
15
10
5
0
-
0.2
-5
Inflation Peaks Troughs
Note: Data is from January 2012 to June 2025. Sample includes 12 CPI Food subgroups.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
(Contd.)
1199
21-naJ 31-naJ 41-naJ 51-naJ 61-naJ 71-naJ 81-naJ 91-naJ 02-naJ 12-naJ 22-naJ 32-naJ 42-naJ 52-naJ
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
21-naJ 31-naJ 41-naJ 51-naJ 61-naJ 71-naJ 81-naJ 91-naJ 02-naJ 12-naJ 22-naJ 32-naJ 42-naJ 52-naJ
Booms SlumpsMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart II.1.2a. Duration of Phases and Full Cycles Chart II.1.2b. Amplitude of Phases and Full Cycles
(Months) (Per cent)
60
30
50 25
40 20
30 15
20 10
10 5
18 21 40 40 17 9 16 17
0 0
Booms Slumps Booms Slumps
Peak-to-peak Trough-to-trough Peak-to-peak Trough-to-trough
Note: Black whiskers indicate interquartile range.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
prolonged boom phases. Boom amplitudes consistently G. Bry and C. Boschan, 7-63. Cambridge, MA: National
exceed slumps across all sub-groups. Intensity of Bureau of Economic Research.
price fluctuations across various sub-groups could be
Cashin, P., McDermott, C. J. and Scott, A. 2002. Booms
driven by divergent factors viz., weather patterns for
and Slumps in World Commodity Prices. Journal of
vegetables, temperature variations for eggs and poultry
Development Economics, 69 (1):277-96.
and global price cycles for edible oils, and pulses where
Sehkar, C.S.C., D. Roy, and Y. Bhatt. 2018. Food Inflation
our import dependency is high.
and Volatility in India: Trends and Determinants.
References Indian Economic Review, 53 (1/2): 65-91.
Bry, G. and Boschan, C. 1971. Programmed Selection World Bank (2025). Post Pandemic Commodity Cycles, A
of Cyclical Turning Points. In Cyclical Analysis of Time New Era? Special Focus, Commodity Markets Outlook,
Series: Selected Procedures and Computer Programs, April.
At the sub-group level, vegetables, pulses and cereals record high fresh arrivals in wholesale markets for
witnessed a sharp moderation in inflation (Chart II.6). short-duration crops, bolstered by favourable weather
Vegetables sub-group9 exhibited an unusually muted conditions, such as a less intense summer, further
and delayed summer season uptick in prices, not just contributed to the precipitous decline in vegetables
inflation (Chart II.7b).
confined to TOP (tomatoes, onions and potatoes), but
also other vegetables, resulting in a y-o-y deflation of Among key vegetables, viz., TOP11, prices were
(-) 15.9 per cent in August (Chart II.7a). Robust domestic significantly lower during April-August 2025
production in 2024-2510 of longer-duration crops and as compared with a year ago.12 Fewer weather
9 Vegetables sub-group has a weight of 6.0 per cent in the overall CPI and 13.2 per cent in the food and beverages group.
10 6.0 per cent higher for vegetables, over 2023-24, as per Second Advance Estimates (AE).
11 Tomato, onion and potato together constitute 36.5 per cent of CPI vegetables index.
12 Tomato, onion and potato prices were 21.5 per cent, 24.6 per cent and 27.3 per cent lower, respectively, during April-August 2025 as compared with
the corresponding period of the previous year.
20Chapter II Prices and Costs
disruptions led to steady availability of tomatoes vegetables in 2025-26 so far was also lower
in wholesale markets.13 The price build-up among in comparison to last two years (Chart II.7c).
Chart II.7: CPI Vegetables Inflation
a. Drivers b. Market Arrivals of Vegetables*
(Percentage points) (Million metric tonnes)
50
30
10
-10
-30 -15.9
c. Price Build-up d. Volatility (Standard Deviation)
(Per cent) (Per cent)
Notes: 1. *: Data pertain to cumulative arrivals during April-August for each year.
2. Other vegetables include beans, brinjal, cabbage, carrot, cauliflower, dhania, garlic, ginger, gourd, green chillies, okra, lemon, parwal, peas and spinach.
3. Figures in parentheses indicate items' weights in CPI-Vegetables sub-group.
Sources: NSO; Agmarknet; and RBI staff estimates.
13 Although there are reports of crop losses on account of flash floods in many producing areas such as Himachal Pradesh, daily data on retail prices from
Department of Consumer Affairs (DCA) is yet to show any significant pick-up in prices in September.
2211
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
25 23 60
20 40
15 20
10 0
5 -20
0 -40
Potato (16.3) Onion (10.7)
Tomato (9.5) Other vegetables (63.5) Potato Onion Tomato Other vegetables
Vegetables (y-o-y, per cent) All vegetables (y-o-y, per cent; right scale) All vegetables
20 19.0
16
12 10.0 11.3
8 6.5 5.7 6.1 4 4.0 2.7 3.3 3.9 4.6 3.6
0 Average 2023 2024 2025
2015-22 (Apr-Aug) (Apr-Aug) (Apr-Aug)
(Apr-Aug)
Vegetables TOP Non-TOP
4102 5102 6102 7102 8102 9102 0202 1202 2202 3202 4202 5202
60
50
40
30
20
10 19.4 0
-10
rpA yaM nuJ luJ guA peS tcO voN ceD naJ beF raM
Chart II.6: Food Sub-group-level Inflation
(Per cent)
Food Sub-groups Jul-24 Aug-24 Sep-24 Oct-24 Nov-24 Dec-24 Jan-25 Feb-25 Mar-25 Apr-25 May-25 Jun-25 Jul-25 Aug-25
Vegetables (13.2)
Pulses and Products (5.2)
Cereal and Products (21.1)
Fruits (6.3)
Sugar and Confectionery (3.0)
Egg,meat and fish (8.8)
Prepared Meals (12.1)
Milk and Products (14.4)
Non-alcoholic Beverages (2.8)
Spices (5.5)
Oils and Fats (7.8)
less than (-)10 per cent 0 to 4 per cent 6 to 10 per cent
(-)10 to 0 per cent 4 to 6 per cent greater than 10 per cent
Note: Width of each row reflects the corresponding weight in the CPI food and beverages group (given in parantheses).
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Average: 2017-18 to 2022-23Monetary Policy Report October 2025
The price volatility in vegetables sub-group and TOP
Chart II.9: Cereals Inflation
during April-August 2025 was also low (Chart II.7d).
(Y-o-y, per cent)
16
Pulses14, the primary source of plant-based protein,
was the other sub-group which recorded a double- 14
digit deflation [(-)14.5 per cent in August 2025]. 12
Pulses inflation has corrected on a sustained basis
10
from June 2024 amidst augmented availability,
8
primarily supported by government interventions
6
and imports. According to Directorate General of
4 4.3
Commercial Intelligence and Statistics, imports of
2.7
pulses scaled a record 7.3 million metric tonnes in 2
1.0
2024-25, a 54 per cent increase from a year ago. Higher 0
domestic production (4.1 per cent increase in 2024-25)
and ample stocks also contributed to the moderation in
Cereals and products Rice Wheat/Atta
prices. Pulses prices continued to correct during 2025- Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
26 so far, contrary to the gradual pick-up witnessed
during the previous years (Chart II.8). per cent in 2024-25) and high buffer stocks (3.5 times
Cereals15 was the third major sub-group which the norm as on September 16, 2025), contributed to
contributed to the fall in food inflation, as inflation in the moderation in inflation. Wheat inflation softened
this category declined to 2.7 per cent in August 2025 from a recent high of 9.2 per cent in February 2025
(lowest since December 2021) from 7.3 per cent a year to 4.3 per cent in August, aided by record production
ago (Chart II.9). Record rice production (higher by 8.2 (3.7 per cent increase in 2024-25), comfortable buffer
14 Pulses sub-group has a weight of 2.4 per cent in the CPI and 5.2 per cent in the food and beverages group.
15 Cereals sub-group has a weight of 9.7 per cent in the CPI and 21.1 per cent in the food and beverages group.
22
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Chart II.8: CPI Pulses and Products Inflation
a. Contribution of Major Items b. Cumulative Price Build-up
(Percentage points) (Per cent)
25
20
15
10
5
0
-5
-10
-15
-14.5
-20
2023-24 2025-26
2024-25 Average; 2017-18 to 2022-23
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
25
20
16.6
15
10
5
3.0
0
-2.6
-5
-6.5
-10
Urad Tur
Masur Other pulses and products
Moong Pulses and products (y-o-y, per cent)
Gram
rpA yaM nuJ luJ guA peS tcO voN ceD naJ beF raMChapter II Prices and Costs
Chart II.10: CPI Edible Oils and Fats Inflation
a. Edible Oil Prices: Domestic and Global b. Drivers of CPI Oil and Fats Inflation
(Y-o-y change, per cent) (Percentage points)
25 60
21.2
20
40
15
10 10.0 20
5
0
0
-5 3.9 -20
-10
-40
-15
-20 -60
Notes: 1. #: Refined oil includes sunflower, soybean, saffola etc.
2. *: Includes groundnut oil and fats (ghee, butter, vanaspati / margarine)
Sources: World Bank Pink Sheet; NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
stocks (1.2 times the norm as on September 16, 2025) were predominantly from coconut, as high
and continued export restrictions. temperatures and unseasonal rains led to lower
production. Apple prices have also hardened during
While overall food inflation remained on a declining
December 2024 to July 2025 (Chart II.11).
trajectory, 'oils and fats' and fruits sub-groups
witnessed a contrarian trend. 'Oils and fats'16 inflation
rose significantly to 21.2 per cent in August 2025
(Chart II.10). This was primarily driven by an increase
in international palm oil prices, partly on account
of an increased bio-diesel mandate in Indonesia
exacerbating global demand-supply imbalance. Despite
a 10-percentage points import duty cut on crude edible
oil effective from the end of May 2025, prices did
not witness any major correction as supply concerns
amid geopolitical escalations offset the impact.
Among domestically produced oilseeds, mustard and
rapeseed and coconut recorded a decline in production
in 2024-2517, adding to the price pressure. Ghee and
butter price inflation, however, remained relatively
moderate, driven by lower inflation in milk prices.
Fruits18 sub-group recorded double-digit inflation
consistently since January 2025. The price pressures
16 With a weight of 3.6 per cent in the CPI and 7.8 per cent within the food and beverages group.
17 Mustard and rapeseed production declined by (-) 4.9 per cent in 2024-25 as per third AE of crop production. Coconut production declined by (-) 4.6 per
cent in 2024-25 as per Second AE of horticulture production.
18 With a weight of 2.9 per cent in the CPI and 6.3 per cent within the food and beverages group.
2233
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
25
21.2
20
15
10
5
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
CPI oils and fats Global palm oil (right scale)
Global oils and meals (right scale)
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Mustard oil Coconut oil
Refined oil# Others*
Oils and fats (y-o-y, per cent)
Chart II.11: Drivers of CPI Fruits Inflation
(Percentage points)
20
15
11.7
10
5
0
-5
Notes: 1. #: Includes coconut, green coconut, and copra.
2. *: Includes dates, cashewnut, walnut, other nuts, raisin etc.
3. Figures in parantheses indicate items’ weights in CPI-Fruits sub-group.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Banana (19.4) Groundnut (9.9)
Mango (11.1) Coconut# (14.1)
Other fruits (21.0) Other dry fruits* (8.2)
Apple (16.3) Fruits (y-o-y, per cent)Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Among other food items, spices continued to remain
Chart II.12: CPI Fuel Group Inflation
in deflation. Animal-based protein inflation declined (Y-o-y, per cent)
15
marginally driven by lower prices of egg and meat.
10
Prepared meals and non-alcoholic beverages, on the 6.1
contrary, have registered a gradual increase in inflation 5 2.4
2.0
0
during April-August 2025 over the corresponding 2.0
-5
period of last year. -5.0
-10
CPI Fuel Group
-15
CPI fuel group came out of deflation in March 2025, -20
recording a first positive print of y-o-y inflation -25
after 18 months (Chart II.12). Despite a subsequent -30
uptick in CPI fuel inflation on account of the hike
in LPG prices by ₹50 per cylinder effective April
8, 2025, inflation remained in the range of 2.4-2.9
per cent during April-August 2025. Kerosene group
largely remained in deflation, reflecting subdued
international prices. Subsidised kerosene prices in
metro cities were lowered thrice during April-June
but were hiked again in July and August (Chart II.13).
In May 2025, electricity tariff announcements by a
number of states led to a spike in the electricity index.
On a y-o-y basis, however, it moderated from 5.4 per
cent in March to 2.0 per cent in August 2025 as the
magnitude of increases were lower than that in the
previous year.
24
32-guA 32-peS 32-tcO 32-voN 32-ceD 42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
Electricity (33.0) LPG (excl. conveyance) (18.8)
Kerosene (8.0) Other fuel (36.7) CPI fuel and light
Note: Figures in parentheses indicate item's weights in CPI-fuel group.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
Core CPI (CPI excluding Food and Fuel)
Core inflation (CPI excluding food and fuel) during
April-August 2025 averaged 4.2 per cent, higher
than 3.2 per cent recorded a year ago. In terms of
monthly trajectory, it edged up to 4.2-4.4 per cent in
April-June 2025 from 4.1 per cent in March, before
moderating to 4.1-4.2 per cent in July-August. A
major driver of core inflation this year has been the
80
70
60
50 48.1
44.3
40
30
Kerosene - International Kerosene - Domestic (subsidised) LPG - International LPG - Domestic
Notes: 1. The international price for LPG is based on spot prices for Saudi Butane and Propane, combined in the ratio of 60:40 respectively. These international product
prices are indicative import prices. Further details are available at www.ppac.org.in.
2. The indicative international price for kerosene is the Singapore Jet Kero spot price.
3. The domestic prices of LPG and kerosene represent the average prices of four and three metros, respectively, as reported by Indian Oil Corporation Limited (IOCL).
Sources: Bloomberg; IOCL; and RBI staff estimates.
32-peS 32-voN 42-naJ 42-raM 42-yaM 42-luJ 42-peS 42-voN 52-naJ 52-raM 52-yaM 52-luJ 52-peS
1200
1000
863.3
800
600
629.1
400
32-peS 32-voN 42-naJ 42-raM 42-yaM 42-luJ 42-peS 42-voN 52-naJ 52-raM 52-yaM 52-luJ 52-peS
Chart II.13: Domestic and International Fuel Prices
a. Kerosene b. LPG
(₹ per litre) (₹ per 14.2 kg cylinder)Chapter II Prices and Costs
rise in gold prices, which is part of the 'personal care
Chart II.15: CPI Inflation excluding Food
and effects' sub-group. Between March and August and Fuel: Persistence
2025, gold prices rose by 14.7 per cent pushing its [In(cid:28)lation (y-o-y, per cent), x-axis;
cross-sectional standard deviation, y-axis]
contribution to core inflation to 117 bps in August.
18
Rise in international gold prices, driven by heightened
16
global economic and geopolitical uncertainty that
14
encouraged safe haven buying and sustained demand
12
for gold as a financial asset by central banks and
10
investors, drove domestic price increases. Housing, 8
health, and transport and communication remained 6
the other major contributors to core inflation 4
(Chart II.14). 2
0
Although core inflation during April-August 2025
2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
was higher than a year ago, its volatility remained
2020-21 (Jun-Feb) 2021-22 (Jun-Mar) 2022-23 (Apr-Mar)
comparable to last year. Both the level and variability 2023-24 (Apr-Mar) 2024-25 (Apr-Mar) 2025-26 (Apr-Aug)
of core inflation, however, remained below those seen Note: Each dot represents a month, plotting the y-o-y inflation level (x-axis)
against the cross-sectional standard deviation across all items (y-axis). Dots with
in the immediate post-COVID years (Chart II.15). Other the same colour correspond to months within the same financial year.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
exclusion-based measures of underlying inflation,
which exclude items such as petrol, diesel, gold and to 3.1 per cent in August, 103 bps below conventional
silver in addition to food and fuel recorded a similar core inflation (i.e., excluding food and fuel).
trajectory (Table II.2). Inflation in CPI excluding food,
Decomposing CPI inflation excluding food, fuel,
fuel, petrol, diesel, gold and silver components eased petrol, diesel, gold, and silver into its goods and
services components19 shows that goods inflation
Chart II.14: Contribution to CPI Core Inflation
(Percentage points)
Table II.2: Exclusion-based Measures of Inflation
CPI excluding food fuel
(y-o-y, per cent)
(y-o-y, per cent) 4.2
of which
Period CPI excluding CPI excluding CPI excluding food
Transport and communication (18.2) 0.5 food and fuel food fuel petrol fuel petrol diesel
(47.3) diesel (45.0) gold silver (43.8)
Health (12.5)
0.6 Aug-24 3.3 3.5 3.0
Clothing and footwear (13.8)
0.4 Sep-24 3.5 3.8 3.2
Housing (21.3) 0.7 Oct-24 3.8 4.0 3.3
Household goods and services (8.0) 0.2 Nov-24 3.7 3.9 3.3
Personal care and effects (8.2) Dec-24 3.6 3.9 3.3
1.3
Jan-25 3.6 3.9 3.2
Education (9.4)
0.4 Feb-25 4.1 4.3 3.4
Others* (8.6)
0.2 Mar-25 4.1 4.3 3.3
Core goods (51.3) 2.4 Apr-25 4.2 4.4 3.5
Core services (48.7) May-25 4.2 4.3 3.4
1.8
Jun-25 4.4 4.6 3.5
Average: 2017-18 to 2019-20 2024-25 2025-26 (Apr-Aug)
Jul-25 4.1 4.2 3.2
Notes: 1. Figures in parentheses indicate weights in CPI excluding food and fuel. Aug-25 4.2 4.3 3.1
2. *: Includes Pan, tobacco and intoxicants; and Recreation and
Notes: 1. Figures in parentheses indicate weights in CPI.
amusement.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates. 2. Derived as a residual from headline CPI.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
19 Goods component in CPI excluding food, fuel, petrol, diesel, gold and silver has a weight of 20.7 per cent in the headline CPI and that of services
component is 23.0 per cent.
2255Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart II.16: Contributions to CPI Inflation excluding Food, Fuel, Petrol, Diesel, Gold, and Silver
a. Goods b. Services
(Percentage points) (Percentage points)
6
5
4
3 2.9
2
1
0
-1
Personal care and effects Health
Recreation and amusement Transport and communication
Clothing and footwear Education
Household goods and services Pan, tobacco and intoxicants
Goods inflation (y-o-y, per cent) [20.7]
Notes: 1. Figures in parentheses indicate weights in CPI.
2. *: Represents balancing item to reconcile divergence in CPI index between CPI items indices aggregated vertically, across items and the published
sub-group/group/overall CPI index.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
remained steady around 2.9 per cent for the last one
year while services inflation recorded a gradual uptick
till June. However, there was a sharp decline in the
services inflation from 4.1 per cent in June to 3.3
per cent in August driven by a huge favourable base
effect which was most prominent in the transport and
communication sub-group on account of the mobile
tariff hike of July 2024. Core services inflation was at
3.3 per cent in August 2025 (Chart II.16).
II.3 Decoding the Inflation Dynamics
Statistical Properties
Statistical properties of inflation provide insights
into the nature of inflation dynamics, both in
terms of the trajectory and underlying changes in
trend. The distribution of CPI inflation in 2025 so
far (January-August 2025) vis-à-vis 2024 indicates a
relatively milder positive skew, reflecting a broad-
based easing of price pressures. The distribution also
26
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
6
5
4 3.3
3
2
1
0
-1
Transport and communication Housing
Personal care and effects Health
Recreation and amusement Clothing and footwear
Household goods and services Education
Services inflation (y-o-y, per cent) [23.0] Others*
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
recorded a narrowing in width, suggesting reduced
inflation volatility among sub-groups (Chart II.17).
In terms of monthly trajectory, the decline in
inflationary pressures since April has been
accompanied by a widening of the inflation divergence
across quantiles (Chart II.18). The widening of inflation
divergence across CPI sub-groups highlights the role
of a few sub-groups in driving headline numbers to
ultra-low levels.
Other measures of underlying inflation such as the
trimmed mean measures and the weighted median20
remained at a much lower level than CPI excluding
food and fuel inflation (Table II.3). In terms of
trajectory, they remain largely aligned with the
conventional core inflation.
Diffusion indices21 generally moderated during 2025-
26 so far except in July and August, indicating that
the number of items within CPI experiencing price
20 While exclusion-based measures drop a fixed set of volatile items (for example, food and fuel) in each period, trimmed measures exclude items located
in the tails of the inflation distribution - items displaying changes more than the specified threshold in prices each month are excluded, and the items
dropped differ from month to month. The weighted median inflation rate is defined as the inflation rate corresponding to the item that lies at the 50th
percentile in the distribution of price changes within the CPI basket, weighted using CPI weights.
21 The CPI diffusion index, a measure of dispersion of price changes, categorises items in the CPI basket according to whether their m-o-m seasonally
adjusted prices have risen, remained stagnant or fallen over the previous month. The higher the reading above 50, the broader is the expansion or
generalisation of price increases; the further is the reading below 50, the broader is the price decline across items.Chapter II Prices and Costs
Chart II.18: CPI Sub-Group/
Group Inflation Range
(y-o-y, per cent)
12
10
8
6
4
2 2.1
0
-2
10th to 90th percentile CPI headline Target
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
pressures are also on the decline across both goods
and services components (Chart II.19a). This is also
corroborated by the low share of items with high
inflation (above 6 per cent) in the CPI basket, which in
22 The CPI weighting diagrams use the modified mixed reference period (MMRP) data based on the 2011-12 Consumer Expenditure Survey conducted by
the National Sample Survey Office. Under MMRP, data are collected on expenditure incurred during the last seven days for frequently purchased items
like edible oil, eggs, fish, meat, vegetables, fruits, spices, beverages, processed foods, pan, tobacco and intoxicants; expenditure incurred during the last
365 days for items like clothing, bedding, footwear, education, medical (institutional), durable goods; and expenditure incurred in the last 30 days for all
other food, fuel and light, miscellaneous goods and services including non-institutional medical services, rents and taxes.
2277
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Chart II.17: Average CPI Inflation (y-o-y)
(Kernel Density Estimates)
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
-20 -10 0 10 20 30
Inflation (per cent)
2017 to 2019 (Jan-Aug) 2024 (Jan-Aug)
2025 (Jan-Aug)
Note: Kernel density estimation is a statistical technique that creates a smooth
estimate of a probability density function from a dataset by summing up
localized kernel functions centered on each data point.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
August stood at 15.5 per cent, the lowest since August
2017 (Chart II.19b).
Inflation across goods and services
Another measure to gauge the underlying inflation
Table II.3: Measures of Underlying Inflation: dynamics is to classify the products across goods
Trimmed Mean Measures and Weighted Median (both perishable and non-perishable) and services22.
(y-o-y, per cent)
Goods (with a weight of 76.6 per cent in the overall
Month 5% 10% 25% Weighted CPI) contributed to around 70 per cent of headline
trimmed trimmed trimmed Median
inflation between March and May 2025 but their
Aug-24 3.9 3.7 3.3 3.0
Sep-24 4.4 3.9 3.5 3.0 contribution dropped to around 53 per cent in June
Oct-24 4.6 4.1 3.5 3.0 and July 2025. The negative contribution of perishable
Nov-24 4.6 4.1 3.5 3.2
items, including vegetables, spices, fruits and other
Dec-24 4.5 4.1 3.5 3.1
food items such as milk, meat and fish and prepared
Jan-25 4.1 3.7 3.4 2.9
Feb-25 3.7 3.5 3.3 2.9 meals, drove this moderation. The contribution of
Mar-25 3.6 3.4 3.2 2.9 semi-perishables consisting of cereals, pulses, and
Apr-25 3.3 3.4 3.3 3.0
personal care to overall inflation remained broadly
May-25 3.1 3.3 3.3 3.2
stable till July, while that of durables rose, primarily
Jun-25 2.8 3.1 3.1 3.1
Jul-25 2.7 3.0 3.1 3.0 reflecting the surge in gold prices. The trends,
Aug-25 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 however, reversed in August 2025 with contribution
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates. of goods inflation (driven by perishables) climbingMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart II.19: CPI Diffusion Indices (M-o-M Seasonally Adjusted)
a: CPI Headline, Goods and Services b. Cumulative Weight of Items Across
(Index) Inflation Ranges
100 (Per cent)
91.8
90
80 74.7
70
69.5
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
CPI headline CPI goods CPI services
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
up to 62.5 per cent of headline inflation, even as the
contribution of semi-perishables and durables came
down. Meanwhile, services (with a weight of 23.4 per
cent) saw their contribution increase from around
26 per cent in March to 48 per cent in July, before
moderating to 37.5 per cent in August (Chart II.20).
28
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
<2 per cent 2-4 per cent 4-6 per cent >6 per cent
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Chart II.20: Contribution of Goods and Services
(Percentage points)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2 2.1
0.7
1 0.8
0.4
0 0.2
-1
Non-durable 7 days recall (34.8) Services (23.4)
Non-durable 30 days recall (31.3) Durable (10.5)
CPI headline inflation (y-o-y, per cent) Others*
Notes: 1. Figures in parentheses indicate weights in CPI.
2. *: Represents balancing item to reconcile divergence in CPI between
CPI items indices aggregated vertically, across items and the published
sub-group/group/overall CPI.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Regional Trends in Inflation
Turning to inflation trajectory across regions, both
urban and rural areas have been experiencing a
sustained easing since October 2024. The higher
weight of food in the rural CPI basket, coupled with a
larger magnitude of decline in food inflation, resulted
in rural inflation remaining below urban levels since
March 2025 (Chart II.21).
There was a marked decline in the number of states
witnessing high inflation during April–August 2025
as compared with the corresponding period of last
year. 30 out of the 36 States/UTs recorded inflation
below 4 per cent during this period (Table II.4). One
state, Kerala, where headline inflation has risen
sharply in recent months, devotes a larger share of
their consumption basket to coconut and coconut oil23,
prices of which have increased meteorically.24
II.4 Drivers of Inflation Trajectory
While the disaggregated analysis provides a commodity
level understanding of inflation dynamics, the drill
down into factors that condition the overall inflation
23 As per the Household Consumption Expenditure Survey 2011-12 (basis of current CPI 2012=100), adjusted for differences in state-level Monthly per
Capita Expenditure (MPCE) relative to the All-India MPCE, coconut consumption in Kerala is about 6 times more than the all-India consumption, whereas
coconut oil consumption in Kerala is about 16 times more than the all-India consumption.
24 Coconut and coconut oil recorded an average inflation of 52.0 per cent and 102.1 per cent during April-August 2025.Chapter II Prices and Costs
Chart II.21: CPI Headline Inflation: Urban and Rural Table II.4: Distribution of Headline Inflation
(Y-o-y, per cent) across States/UTs: Number of States#
8
Headline Inflation Range 2024-25 2025-26
7 (Per cent) (Apr-Aug) (Apr-Aug)
Between 0 to 2.0 3 14
6
Between 2.0 to 4.0 14 16
5 Between 4.0 to 6.0 18 5
Greater than 6.0 1 1
4
Note: # Accounted for the unification of Daman and Diu with Dadra &
3 Nagar Haveli and the formation of Ladakh as a Union Territory.
2.5 Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
2
1.7
inputs, deflation is led by declining prices of diesel
1
and fertilisers.
0
Rural labour cost, reflected in nominal rural wage
growth was range-bound between 6.4-6.6 per cent in
Rural Urban
Q1:2025-26, with agricultural wages recording a faster
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
growth (Chart II.24). Growth in agricultural wages was
trajectory such as imported inflation, costs, wages and broad-based across occupations with seasonal uptick
other macroeconomic factors provide insights into the seen for horticultural workers, harvesting and picking
underlying drivers of inflation. workers, inland fishermen, and ploughing/tilling
workers. Real rural wages (deflated by CPI rural index)
Imported Inflation
increased at a faster rate as inflation moderated.
The contribution of imported components25 to
headline inflation remained modest till July 2025 on
the back of moderate energy prices26, despite a sharp
uptick in the global prices of gold and silver. The
uptick seen in August 2025 was mainly driven by gold,
silver, and edible oils (Chart II.22).
Costs
Input cost inflation, as measured by Wholesale Price
Index (WPI) inflation in industrial raw materials and
farm inputs, recorded deflation during April to August
2025 (Chart II.23). The pass-through of moderation
in international commodity prices, barring that of
precious metals, contributed significantly to this
moderation. Among industrial inputs, aviation
turbine fuel, high-speed diesel, naphtha, and furnace
oil prices witnessed a decline in inflation. For farm
25 Global commodities that drive domestic prices include petroleum products; coal; electronic goods; gold; silver; chemical products; metal products;
textiles; cereals; milk products, and vegetables oils – these together have a weight of 36.4 per cent in the CPI basket (adjusted weights based on pass-
through from international prices is at 8.4 per cent).
26 Lower International crude petroleum, kerosene, propane and butane prices.
2299
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Chart II.22: Contribution of Imported Inflation to
Headline Inflation
(Percentage points)
10
8
6
4
2 2.1
1.3
0 0.8
-2
-4
Imported inflation Domestically generated inflation
CPI headline inflation (y-o-y, per cent)
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guAMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart II.24: Wage Growth and Inflation in Rural Areas
(Y-o-y, per cent)
10
9
8
7.5
7
6.6
6 5.8
5
4
3
2
1
0
CPI Rural CPI Agricultural Labourers
Agricultural Labourers* Non Agricultural Labourers**
CPI Rural Labourers Average Rural Wage
Notes:
1. Data for CPI-Agricultural Labourers and CPI-Rural Labourers during May-July 2025
pertains to the rebased series with base 2019=100, published by Labour Bureau,
Ministry of Labour & Employment on July 18, 2025.
2. *: Comprises ploughing, sowing, harvesting, picking, horticulture workers,
fishermen inland, fishermen costal, loggers and wood cutters, animal husbandry,
packaging, general agriculture labourers, plant protection workers.
3. **: Comprises carpenter, blacksmith, mason, weavers, beedi makers, bamboo, cane
basket weavers, handicraft workers, plumbers, electrician, construction workers, light
motor vehicle & tractor drivers, sweeping/cleaning workers, and other
non-agricultural labourers.
Sources: NSO; Labour Bureau; and RBI staff estimates.
In the organised sector, staff cost growth (y-o-y) edged managers’ index (PMI) reported an expansion in input
up for manufacturing sector during Q4:2024-25 and prices for August 2025. Movements in output prices
Q1:2025-26 following the slump in Q3:2024-25. In the charged by manufacturing firms broadly mirrored the
services sector, staff cost growth remained muted in trend in input prices (Chart II.26a).
Q1:2025-26 (Chart II.25).
Operating expenses of services sector reflected in PMI
In terms of assessment of cost conditions, services increased in August 2025 with prices charged
manufacturing firms polled for the purchasing by services firms also moving in tandem. The input-
30
32-luJ 32-peS 32-voN 42-naJ 42-raM 42-yaM 42-luJ 42-peS 42-voN 52-naJ 52-raM 52-yaM 52-luJ
Chart II.23: Farm and Non-farm Input Cost Inflation
(Y-o-y, per cent)
6
4
2
0.5
0 0.0
-1.3
-2
-4
-6
-10
Overall WPI Industrial raw materials* Farm inputs$
Notes:
1. *: Comprises primary non-food articles, minerals, coal, aviation turbine fuel,
high speed diesel, naphtha, bitumen, furnace oil, lube oil, petroleum coke,
electricity, cotton yarn and paper and pulp from WPI.
2. $: Comprises high speed diesel, fodder, electricity, fertilizers, pesticides, and
agricultural and forestry machinery from WPI.
3. WPI Electricity captures unit revenue data from selected power generators.
Sources: Ministry of Commerce and Industry; and RBI staff estimates.
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
-8
Chart II.25: Staff Cost in Manufacturing and Services Sectors
a. Manufacturing Sector b. Services Sector
(Per cent) (Per cent)
14 5.9 6
12
10 11.0 5 8
6 5.4 4
4
2
3 0
-2 -4 2
-6 -5.2
-8 1
Base effect Staff cost growth (y-o-y) Base effect Staff cost growth (y-o-y)
Quarterly momemtum Quarterly momemtum
Staff cost/value of production (right scale) Staff cost/value of production (right scale)
Note: Staff cost growth (y-o-y) is based on a common set of companies.
Sources: Capitaline database; and RBI staff estimates.
22-12-4Q 32-22-1Q 32-22-2Q 32-22-3Q 32-22-4Q 42-32-1Q 42-32-2Q 42-32-3Q 42-32-4Q 52-42-1Q 52-42-2Q 52-42-3Q 52-42-4Q 62-52-1Q
30 40
25 35
20 26.6 30
15 9.7 25
10 20
5 4.1
15 0
-5 10 -4.1
-10 5
-15 0
22-12-4Q 32-22-1Q 32-22-2Q 32-22-3Q 32-22-4Q 42-32-1Q 42-32-2Q 42-32-3Q 42-32-4Q 52-42-1Q 52-42-2Q 52-42-3Q 52-42-4Q 62-52-1QChapter II Prices and Costs
Chart II.26: PMI Input-Output Price Gap
a. Manufacturing Sector b. Services Sector
[Index (seasonally adjusted, 50=No change), [Index (seasonally adjusted, 50=No change),
left scale; index gap, right scale] left scale; index gap, right scale]
75 5
70 4
65 3
60 2
55 54.4 1
52.7
50 0
45 -1
40 -2
35 -3
Output prices Input prices Output prices Input prices
Input-output price gap (right scale)
Sources: S&P Global; and RBI staff estimates.
output price gap for both manufacturing and services ease in manufacturing and infrastructure sectors
sector firms do not indicate any pent-up pass-through during Q3:2025-26, but pick up in the services sector
(Chart II.26b). (Chart II.27a). During Q3:2025-26, input cost and
On the assessment and outlook of cost conditions, as selling price pressures are expected to moderate for
per the firms polled in the Reserve Bank’s enterprise the infrastructure sector whereas both are expected to
surveys27, salary outgo pressures are expected to harden for the services sector (Chart II.27b and II.27c).
27 Industrial Outlook Survey; and Services and Infrastructure Outlook Survey.
3311
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
75 5
70 4
65 3
60 2
55.5
55 1
55.3
50 0
45 -1
40 -2
35 -3
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
Input-output price gap (right scale)
Chart II.27: Expectations of Cost and Price Conditions
a. Salary Outgo b. Cost of Inputs c. Selling Prices
(Net response, per cent) (Net response, per cent) (Net response, per cent)
Note: ‘Net response’ is the difference between the percentage of respondents reporting an increase in prices and those reporting decrease.
Sources: Reserve Bank’s Industrial Outlook Survey; Services & Infrastructure Outlook survey; and RBI staff estimates.
noisnapxE
noitcartnoC
90
80
70
60
50 50.8
40 46.2
30 29.9
20
10
0
-10
-20
Manufacturing firms Services firms Infrastructure firms
22-1202:4Q 32-2202:1Q 32-2202:2Q 32-2202:3Q 32-2202:4Q 42-3202:1Q 42-3202:2Q 42-3202:3Q 42-3202:4Q 52-4202:1Q 52-4202:2Q 52-4202:3Q 52-4202:4Q 62-5202:1Q 62-5202:2Q 62-5202:3Q
90
80
70
60 57.8
53.5 50
40 45.6
30
20
10
0
-10
-20
22-1202:4Q 32-2202:1Q 32-2202:2Q 32-2202:3Q 32-2202:4Q 42-3202:1Q 42-3202:2Q 42-3202:3Q 42-3202:4Q 52-4202:1Q 52-4202:2Q 52-4202:3Q 52-4202:4Q 62-5202:1Q 62-5202:2Q 62-5202:3Q
90
80
70
60
50 45.8
40 43.6
30
24.1
20
10
0
-10
-20
22-1202:4Q 32-2202:1Q 32-2202:2Q 32-2202:3Q 32-2202:4Q 42-3202:1Q 42-3202:2Q 42-3202:3Q 42-3202:4Q 52-4202:1Q 52-4202:2Q 52-4202:3Q 52-4202:4Q 62-5202:1Q 62-5202:2Q 62-5202:3QMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Margins 2025, aimed at simplifying tax rates and lowering
The absolute retail price margins28 remained steady in prices for the final consumer. A mapping of changes
case of select cereals (rice, wheat and atta), pulses and in GST rates to the CPI shows that about 11.4 per cent
edible oils, during April-September 2025 (Chart II.28). of the CPI basket would be impacted by the recent
The stable retail price margins of edible oils post changes, with the magnitude varying significantly
import-tariff duty reduction in May 2025 indicate across product groups (Table II.5). The overall impact
that there is no pent-up price transmission post the of GST changes on CPI inflation would be conditional
duty reduction with domestic prices firming up in on the extent of the pass-through which is likely to
both wholesale and retail markets. Retail margins remain partial on account of offsetting changes in
decreased in TOP vegetables in September 2025 after input tax credit and compensation cess, as well as
some increase seen during July-August 2025.29 various forms of price rigidities.
GST Rationalisation Overall, the historical decomposition of inflation
The Government has implemented GST rate using a VAR30 model indicates that the moderation in
rationalisation measures effective September 22, inflation witnessed during Q4:2024-25 to Q2:2025-26
Chart II.28: Retail, Wholesale Prices, and Margins
a. Cereals b. Pulses
[Price, left scale; Margin, right scale [Price, left scale; Margin, right scale
(₹ per kilogram)] (₹ per kilogram)]
45 6 42 40.8
39 36.3 5 36
33 4
30
27 3
24
21 2 18
15 1
Retail price Wholesale price Retail price Wholesale price
Retail price margin (right scale) Retail price margin (right scale)
c. Vegetables d. Edible Oils
[Price, left scale; Margin, right scale [Price, left scale; Margin, right scale
(₹ per kilogram)] (₹ per kilogram)]
Retail price Wholesale price Retail price Wholesale price
Retail price margin (right scale) Retail price margin (right scale)
Sources: Department of Consumer Affairs, Ministry of Consumer Affairs, Food and Public Distribution; and RBI staff estimates.
28 Defined as the difference between retail and wholesale prices based on the data collected by DCA.
29 September month price margins are calculated based on daily wholesale and retail price data till September 24, 2025.
30 Historical decomposition estimates the contribution of each shock to the movements in inflation over the sample period (Q4:2010-11 to Q2:2025-26)
based on a VAR with the following variables (represented as the vector Y ) – crude oil prices (US$ per barrel); exchange rate (INR per US$), asset price (BSE
t
Sensex), CPI; the output gap; rural wages; the policy repo rate; and money supply (M3). All variables other than policy repo rate are y-o-y growth rates. The
VAR can be written in reduced form as: Y = c + A Y + e ; where e represents a vector of shocks. Using Wold decomposition, Y can be represented as
t t–1 t t t
a function of its deterministic trend and sum of all the shocks e.
t
32
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
50 12
40 10
30.5
30 23.8 8
20 6
10 4
0 2
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
200 12
180 175.3 11
165.1
160 10
140 9
120 8
100 7
80 6
60 5
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guA
140 16
120 107.5 14
12 100
98.3 10
80
8
60 6
40 4
32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guAChapter II Prices and Costs
Table II.5: GST Slabs mapped to item-level CPI^
Major Items GST 1.0 Rate GST 2.0 Rate Difference CPI Weight
(per cent) (per cent) (percentage points) (per cent)
Primary food articles (Cereals, Pulses, Vegetables, Fresh Fruits, Raw Milk, etc.) 0 0 0 61.3
Gold and Silver 3 3 0 1.2
Clothing and Footwear (less than `1000), Fuel (LPG, kerosene), some household items 5 5 0 18.9
Electrical fittings, small electronic items, washing soap, private tuition fees, etc. 18 18 0 6.1
Coal 5 18 0* 0.04
Demerit goods like pan, tobacco, intoxicants 28 40 0$ 1.1
Stationery items like notebooks, exercise books, pencils, etc. 12 0 -12 0.4
Milk products, Dry fruits, Utensils, Medicines, Sugar, Clothing and Footwear 12 5 -7 4.6
(between `1000 and `2500), etc.
FMCG items: biscuits, soaps, shampoo, shaving kits, etc. 18 5 -13 3.5
White goods like AC, refrigerator, etc. 28 18 -10 2.2
Packaged cooked meal 5 0 -5 0.7
Decreased (Weight in CPI) 11.4
No change (Weight in CPI) 88.6
Notes: 1. ^: Weights are adjusted for assumed proportion of pre-packaged and labelled price quotations collected by NSO for an item under CPI basket.
2. *: Coal attracted, prior to rate rationalization, 5% GST+ Compensation cess of Rs 400/ton. The GST Council has recommended to end
compensation cess and hence the rate has been merged with GST. There is no additional tax burden.
3. $: For cigarettes, chewing tobacco products etc. (excluding bidi, where the GST rate was cut), the existing rates of GST and compensation cess
will continue to apply, and the new rates will be implemented at a later date to be notified, based on discharging of entire loan and interest
liabilities on account of compensation cess. Hence, for these goods, rates are taken as unchanged.
Sources: Goods and Services Tax Council; NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
Chart II.29: Decomposition of CPI Inflation*
(Percentage points)
5 8
4 7
3 6
2
1 5
0 4
-1 3
-2
2
-3
-4 1
-5 0
Fuel price shock Exchange rate shock Policy rate shock
Asset price shock Supply shock Output gap shock
Wage shock Money supply shock
Inflation (right scale, per cent)
3333
42-3202:1Q 42-3202:2Q 42-3202:3Q 42-3202:4Q 52-4202:1Q 52-4202:2Q 52-4202:3Q 52-4202:4Q 62-5202:1Q 62-5202:2Q
was primarily on account of favourable supply shocks than anticipated moderation in food prices. The
(Chart II.29). moderation in inflation has also turned out to be
more generalised with core inflation remaining
II.5 Conclusion
largely rangebound despite pressure exerted by sharp
Headline inflation declined significantly during
increases in gold prices. Going forward, the progress
FY2025-26 (April-August), driven by a faster
of southwest monsoon, higher kharif crop sowing
as well as record reservoir levels, which could help
the rabi sowing are all pointing towards a benign
food price scenario. Recent reduction in GST rates
could further aid in keeping overall inflation low
and below the target during 2025-26, on an average
basis. CPI inflation, however, is likely to edge up,
especially during Q4:2025-26, as unfavourable
base effects kick in, and demand side stimulus
from policy easing come into play. Although
benign inflation conditions are expected to prevail
in the near-term, uncertainties emanating from
unexpected weather shocks as well as international
* Deviation from deterministic trend.
commodity prices continue to pose major risks to the
Note: Estimated using a vector autoregression (see footnote 30 for details).
Q2:2025-26 pertains to July-August 2025.
inflation trajectory.
Sources: NSO; RBI; Petroleum Planning & Analysis Cell (PPAC); BSE; Labour
Bureau; and RBI staff estimates.Monetary Policy Report October 2025
III. Demand and Output
Domestic economic activity remained buoyant in H1:2025-26, driven by strong private consumption and robust
investment. External demand continues to face headwinds from global trade uncertainties and US tariffs.
Manufacturing activity gained strength, while the services sector sustained its momentum. Structural reforms,
including GST 2.0, are expected to support momentum in domestic demand and output.
Domestic economic activity exhibited resilience III.1 Aggregate Demand
in H1:2025-26, with accelerated real GDP growth
Aggregate demand conditions improved further as
in Q1. Aggregate demand continued to be strong,
reflected in the growth of real gross domestic product
underpinned by buoyant private consumption and
(GDP) at 7.8 per cent year-on-year (y-o-y) in Q1:2025-
strengthening investment activity. Government
26 as compared to 7.4 per cent in the previous quarter.
consumption also held up well. Net external demand,
This was driven by buoyant private consumption,
however, remained weak and acted as a drag on
government consumption and fixed investment –
aggregate demand. On the supply side, manufacturing
all three components posted growth of 7 per cent or
activity gained further steam, while the services
above– while net exports acted as a drag on aggregate
sector held its momentum. Agricultural activity
demand (Table III.1 and Chart III.1). The momentum
also expanded at a healthy pace. Going forward, the
of GDP – quarter-on-quarter (q-o-q) seasonally adjusted
high US tariffs, unless resolved, could reduce India’s
annualised growth rate (SAAR) – was placed at 6.7 per
merchandise exports to the largest export destination,
cent (Chart III.1b).
adversely impacting net external demand. The recent
GDP Projections versus Actual Outcomes
structural reforms, including the implementation of
GST 2.0, are expected to boost domestic demand and The actual growth for Q1:2025-26 turned out to be
output, which may mitigate the adverse impact of US higher than projected in the Monetary Policy Report
tariffs. The protracted geopolitical tensions, rising (MPR) of April 2025 (Chart III.2). This was mainly on
geoeconomic fragmentations and global financial account of a stronger than anticipated performance
market volatility continue to pose downside risk to of private consumption and government final
the growth outlook. consumption expenditure.
Table III.1: Real GDP Growth
(Y-o-y, per cent)^
Item 2023-24 2024-25 Weighted Contribution* 2024-25 2025-26
(FRE) (PE) 2023-24 2024-25 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
Private final consumption expenditure 5.6 7.2 3.2 4.0 8.3 6.4 8.1 6.0 7.0
Government final consumption 8.1 2.3 0.8 0.2 -0.3 4.3 9.3 -1.8 7.4
expenditure
Gross fixed capital formation 8.8 7.1 3.0 2.4 6.7 6.7 5.2 9.4 7.8
Exports 2.2 6.3 0.5 1.4 8.3 3.0 10.8 3.9 6.3
Imports 13.8 -3.7 3.3 -0.9 -1.6 1.0 -2.1 -12.7 10.9
GDP at market prices 9.2 6.5 9.2 6.5 6.5 5.6 6.4 7.4 7.8
Note: *: Component-wise contributions to growth do not add up to GDP growth because change in stocks, valuables and discrepancies are not included.
^: Unless specified otherwise, all discussions on growth rates in this chapter are on year-on-year (y-o-y) basis.
FRE: First revised estimates; PE: Provisional estimates.
Sources: National Statistical Office (NSO); and RBI staff estimates.
34Chapter III Demand and Output
Chart III.1: GDP Growth and its Constituents
a. Weighted Contribution of the Components b. GDP Growth and Momentum
to GDP Growth (Y-o-y growth in per cent)
16
(Percentage points)
18
12
12
7.8 7.8
8
6
6.7
4
0
0
-6
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
-4
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
-26
PFCE GFCE 2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025
GFCF Net exports -26
GDP (y-o-y, per cent) y-o-y growth q-o-q SAAR
Notes: PFCE: Private final consumption expenditure; GFCE: Government final consumption expenditure; GFCF: Gross fixed capital formation; SAAR – Seasonally
adjusted annualised rate.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
III.1.1 Private Final Consumption Expenditure conditions are supporting discretionary spending and
private consumption.
Private final consumption expenditure – the mainstay
of aggregate demand – rebounded and grew by 7.0 Latest high frequency indicators (HFIs) show some
per cent (y-o-y), contributing 4.0 percentage points to signs of improvement in urban demand in Q2:2025-26
overall GDP growth in Q1:2025-26. The strong growth (Table III.2). The consumer durables output expanded
in private consumption in Q1 indicates revival in the
at a strong pace in July 2025, while the sales of fast-
discretionary spending of households. The decline in
moving consumer goods in urban areas improved
interest rates, lower inflation and steady employment
during July-August. Passenger vehicle sales posted
positive growth in July 2025 but turned negative in
Chart III.2: GDP Growth - Projection versus Actual
(Y-o-y growth in per cent) August. Growth in bank credit to households (personal
8.0 7.8 loans) remained robust during July-August, despite
6.5 moderating from the last year’s levels. Domestic air
6.0 passenger traffic contracted during July-August, partly
on account of monsoon rains.
4.0 As per the latest round of the Reserve Bank’s Consumer
Confidence Survey, households are optimistic about
their one-year-ahead economic conditions, and the
2.0
consumer confidence also recorded improvement in
September 2025. Consumer expectations, shaped by
0.0
Q1:2025-26 the stance of monetary policy and the signals conveyed
April 2025 MPR Projection Actual by key macroeconomic indicators, are also indicating
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
improvement in private consumption (Box.III.1).
3355Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Table III.2: Indicators of Consumption
(Y-o-y, per cent)
Indicators 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Jul Aug
Urban demand
Domestic air passenger traffic 19.1 23.0 9.1 5.2 5.6 7.3 11.4 12.0 5.3 -2.5 -0.5
Passenger vehicle sales 9.6 5.8 8.6 10.8 20.2 -1.3 5.1 3.6 -1.4 1.5# -9.0#
IIP: Consumer durables -2.7 1.1 5.3 11.2 10.7 6.6 9.0 5.9 2.6 7.7
Personal loans 21.3 30.0 28.4 27.5 25.6 13.4 12.0 11.6 12.1 11.9
Vehicle loans 19.3 21.2 16.4 14.2 15.5 13.3 8.8 8.6 10.8 8.9
Credit card outstanding 37.6 31.4 32.6 25.6 23.3 18.0 15.6 10.6 7.2 5.6
Rural demand
Tractor sales -1.9 -5.8 -4.9 -18.9 0.5 0.7 13.5 17.3 9.2 8.0 28.3
Motorcycle sales 13.8 -2.9 22.1 27.0 16.8 10.2 -1.9 -3.5 -9.2 4.7 4.3
IIP: Consumer non-durables 6.8 7.0 2.5 0.7 -0.2 -2.2 -1.6 -2.0 -1.5 0.5
Fertiliser sales -2.9 6.0 2.4 -5.3 2.4 -7.3 0.4 -9.6 -14.7
MGNREGA work demand 4.4 15.1 1.3 -8.3 -16.1 -16.6 1.7 6.5 1.3 -12.3 -26.1
FMCG sales
Rural 5.7 9.1 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.2
Urban 1.9 4.0 2.4 4.1 3.9 4.3
All India 3.5 6.2 4.9 5.9 5.8 5.9
#: Doesn’t include Tata Motors.
Sources: Directorate General of Civil Aviation (DGCA), Society of Indian Automobile Manufacturers (SIAM); NSO; RBI; Tractor and Mechanization
Association (TMA); Ministry of Chemicals and Fertilisers (MoC&F); Ministery of Rural Development (MoRD); NielsenIQ’s Retail Audit Service; and RBI
staff estimates.
Box III.1: Consumer Confidence Channel: The Perception Pathway in Policy Transmission to
Private Consumption
Private consumption, being the main driver of growth downturns, can lead to reduced spending, reinforcing
in the Indian economy, is tracked actively by analysts the slowdown through a negative feedback loop
as well as policymakers. Though high frequency (Ilut & Saijo, 2020). Recognising the importance of
indicators are generally used to monitor the emerging
confidence channel, a mixed data sampling (MIDAS)
trends in consumption, the qualitative assessment
regression is estimated to examine the impact of
through the consumer confidence channel is also
macroeconomic conditions (GDP growth, government
found to be of significance for monetary policy.
expenditure, and policy interest rates) on the Current
The Reserve Bank of India’s Consumer Confidence
Confidence Index and the Future Expectations Index
Survey serves as a barometer of public sentiment
(Lahiri & Monokroussos, 2016). In the next step,
regarding key economic dimensions such as income,
the autoregressive distributed lags (ARDL) model is
employment, inflation, and households’ spending.
estimated, based on quarterly data spanning Q1:2011-
It captures consumer perceptions of the prevailing
12 to Q4:2024-25, to investigate the influence of
economic conditions through the Current Confidence
Index and anticipated conditions over the short to consumer sentiment, captured through the Current
medium term through the Future Expectations Index. Confidence Index and the Future Expectations Index,
A fall in consumer confidence, especially during on actual private consumption.
(Contd.)
36Chapter III Demand and Output
The results suggest that macroeconomic conditions
Table III.1.1: Relationship between Macro-
(especially GDP growth and policy rate) impact
Economic Variables, Consumer Confidence and
consumer sentiment, which in turn is found to have
Private Consumption
a positive relationship with private consumption
Explanatory Variables Dependent Variables
(Table III.1.1). GDP growth influences both Current
CCI FEI PFCE Confidence Index and Future Expectations Index,
Intercept 3.01 -25.19* -0.02 underscoring its role as a key economic signal. Policy
(23.78) (13.98) (0.10)
rate changes also impact both the Current Confidence
PFCE (Lag 1) 0.08
Index and the Future Expectations Index in the positive
(0.16)
direction, although the extent of impact varies across
CCI 0.14 1.70***
(0.13) (0.33) lags, reflecting dynamic adjustment in consumers’
CCI (Lag 1) -1.38*** expectations. The findings of the ARDL model suggest
(0.27)
that the Current Confidence Index and lagged Future
FEI (Lag 2) 0.38*
(0.19) Expectations Index have a statistically significant
GDP 1.20*** 0.77*** positive relationship with private consumption. The
(0.36) (0.26)
negative effect of the lagged Current Confidence Index
GDP (Lag 1) 1.18** -0.16
may reflect adjustments based on past uncertainties.
(0.43) (0.30)
Overall, the results indicate the working of a feedback
GDP (Lag 2) 0.92* -0.02
(0.45) (0.29) loop wherein macroeconomic conditions impact
Govt expenditure 0.99 1.38** consumer sentiment, which in turn affects private
(1.02) (0.61)
consumption. Thus, consumer sentiments could
WACR# (Lag 1) -0.28* -0.21***
provide valuable insights into the evolving trends in
(0.16) (0.10)
Residual standard error 8.64 5.08 0.69 private consumption that contribute significantly to
Multiple R-squared 0.92 0.88 0.64 aggregate demand.
Adjusted R-squared 0.81 0.70 0.56
References:
F-statistic 8.12*** 4.82*** 7.43***
Notes: 1. Seasonal variables have been seasonally adjusted, and the Ilut, C., and Saijo, H. (2021). Learning, confidence, and
analysis has been conducted using the difference of WACR business cycles. Journal of Monetary Economics, 117,
and log differences of other variables. The bi-monthly survey
results have been converted to a quarterly frequency by 354-376.
aligning them with the reference periods of the corresponding
survey rounds. Lahiri, K., Monokroussos, G., and Zhao, Y. (2016).
2. Figures in parenthesis denote corresponding standard errors. Forecasting consumption: The role of consumer
3. CCI: Current Confidence Index; FEI: Future Expectations
confidence in real time with many predictors. Journal
Index; WACR: Weighted Average Call Rate.
# : Co-efficients for subsequent immediate lags are also significant. of Applied Econometrics, 31(7), 1254-1275.
*** p<0.01, ** p<0.05, * p<0.1
Rural demand continues to remain resilient on the dropped significantly in July-August, reflecting an
back of robust rabi and summer crops production, improvement in farm sector employment. The strong
and a positive outlook for kharif output conditioned growth in fast-moving consumer goods sales in rural
by the above-normal south-west monsoon. Tractor areas also attests to buoyant demand conditions
sales remained upbeat during July-August 2025, (Table III.2). The above normal south-west monsoon
and motorcycle sales witnessed a revival during this (SWM) rainfall, higher cumulative kharif sowing and
period after contracting in preceding months. The improved reservoir level augur well for sustaining
demand for work under the Mahatma Gandhi National the momentum in rural demand.
Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA)
3377Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart III.3: Employment Situation in India
a. Monthly Periodic Labour Force Survey b. Net Payroll Additions in EPFO Records
(Per cent) (Lakhs)
60 7 25
20
55 6
15
10
50 5
5
45 4
0
Apr-25 May-25 Jun-25 Jul-25 Aug-25
Labour force participation rate Unemployment rate (right scale)
Worker population ratio 2023 2024 2025
Sources: Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI); and Employees’ Provident Fund Organisation (EPFO).
Employment conditions remained steady in 2025-26. coincident indicators of construction activity, steel
The labour force participation rate (LFPR) and the consumption and cement production, exhibited
worker population ratio (WPR) as per the monthly strong growth during July-August 2025, sustaining
Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) improved for healthy momentum. Domestic production of capital
both rural and urban areas. The unemployment rate goods recorded modest growth in July after witnesing
declined to 5.1 per cent in August 2025 (Chart III.3a). strong growth in Q1. Import of capital goods grew
sharply in July before contracting in the month of
The Employees’ Provident Fund Organisation (EPFO)
August (Table III.3).
payroll data also indicate strengthening of formal
employment as average net payroll additions during Capacity utilisation in the manufacturing sector1
April-July rose to 17.3 lakh (Chart III.3b). increased marginally to 74.1 per cent in Q1:2025-26
from the same quarter last year. Seasonally adjusted
III.1.2 Gross Fixed Capital Formation
capacity utilisation at 75.8 per cent in Q1, increased
Gross fixed capital formation expanded at a strong
by 30 basis points from the previous quarter and was
pace in Q1:2025-26, aided by robust government
well above the long-period average of 73.9 per cent2
capex. The share of gross fixed capital formation
(Chart III.4). Stretched capacity utilisation generally
in GDP improved to 34.6 per cent in Q1 from 33.9 necessitates new capacity additions to keep pace with
per cent in the previous quarter. The congenial underlying domestic demand. Funds raised for capex
financial conditions, engendered by monetary policy by private corporates during Q1 through the different
easing, along with healthy twin balance sheets channels (Banks/Financial Institutions, External
(banks and corporates) and rising capacity utilisation Commercial Borrowings, Initial Public Offerings)
continue to support fixed investment. Among remained stable, despite heightened uncertainties.
1 Based on RBI’s survey of order books, inventories, and capacity utilisation.
2 Long term average is for the period Q1:2008-09 to Q1:2025-26 excluding Q1:2020-21.
38
naJ beF raM rpA yaM nuJ luJ guA peS tcO voN ceD
21.0
5.1Chapter III Demand and Output
Table III.3: Indicators of Investment Demand Chart III.4: Capacity Utilisation in Manufacturing
(Y-o-y, per cent) (Per cent)
80
Indicators 2024-25 2025-26
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Jul Aug 78
Import of capital 10.0 11.7 6.0 7.9 14.3 12.0 -1.3
goods 75.8
76
IIP: Capital goods 3.0 4.9 7.4 7.0 9.8 5.0
Finished steel 15.3 11.8 7.8 11.9 7.9 7.3 10.0 74 74.1
consumption
73.9
Cement 0.4 3.2 8.7 12.4 8.0 11.6 6.1 72
production
Sources: Directorate General of Commercial Intelligence and Statistics
70
(DGCI&S); NSO; Joint Plant Committee; and Office of Economic Adviser. Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-
25
On the other hand, private capex, especially in
CU CU (seasonally adjusted) Long-term average
export-intensive sectors, faced headwinds from
Source: RBI staff estimates.
global trade uncertainty (Box III.2).
The interest coverage ratio (ICR)3 of the listed private level of one, the elevated interest coverage ratio
manufacturing companies improved in Q1:2025-26, of IT firms inched up further (Table III.4). This, in
indicating strong debt servicing capacity. Within conjunction with congenial financial conditions
the services sector, while interest coverage ratio of and improving domestic demand, should encourage
non-IT services remained stable above the threshold firms to undertake new capacity creation.
Box III.2: External Demand and Fixed Investment Dynamics:
An Empirical Investigation with Firm-level Data
Significant deleveraging of corporate balance sheets firms’ investment decisions. In this regard, Fabling
took place post-COVID, owing to improved profitability and Sanderson (2013) emphasised that exports provide
and easy financial conditions. Strengthening of stable cash flows and ease financial constraints, often
balance sheets generally tends to have positive impact leading to firms’ increased investment in fixed assets.
on corporates’ investment (Gupta et al., 2023; Wang In India too, it has been observed that investment
et al., 2013). The healthy balance sheet of the banking and exports move in tandem, suggesting that export
sector coupled with congenial financial conditions performance boosts investment (Chart III.2.1).
have eased the financing constraints of corporates for
In this backdrop, a fixed effects panel regression is
investments. Notwithstanding all these supporting
estimated, based on data spanning 2004 to 2024, to
factors, the revival in corporate investment cycle
examine the impact of exports on firms’ investment in
is yet to become broad-based, as new investment is
fixed assets. The change in firms’ investment in fixed
witnessed only in a few select sectors.
capital is taken as dependent variable. Apart from
The extant literature underlines the importance of firms’ exports earnings, firm-level control variables
foreign market access (exports) and uncertainty in (Contd.)
3 Interest coverage ratio is the ratio of earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT) to interest expenses and measures a company’s capacity to make interest
payments on its debt. The minimum value for a viable ICR is 1.
3399Monetary Policy Report October 2025
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
(interest coverage ratio) and aggregate merchandise III.2.1). Exporting firms’ investment is roughly 1 per
exports are considered as explanatory variables. The cent more than that of non-exporting firms. Even after
results suggest that export growth at both the firm level
controlling for firm leverage, export-oriented firms
and at the aggregate level has a statistically significant
invest about 0.28 per cent higher than non-exporting
positive impact on fixed investment growth (Table
firms. Based on these results, it may be inferred that
Table III.2.1: Relationship between Exports and
elevated global economic uncertainty due to multiple
Corporate Investment (2004-2024)
shocks post COVID coupled with uneven export
Variables I II III IV V VI performance during the last few years, may also be
ICR (lag 1) 0.12***
contributing to a delayed revival in private corporate
(0.005)
investment cycle.
Export Firm 0.95*** 0.28*
(0.141) (0.146)
References
Taper tantrum -0.29***
(0.009)
Fabling, R., & Sanderson, L. (2013). Exporting and
Forex earnings 0.03*** 0.02*** 0.02*** 0.02***
firm performance: Market entry, investment and
growth (0.001) (0.001) (0.001) (0.001)
Exports 0.06*** 0.24*** expansion. Journal of International Economics, 89(2),
growth (0.004) (0.008)
422-431.
Constant 14.35*** 12.05*** 13.50*** 18.58*** 12.98*** 12.34***
(0.081) (0.099) (0.028) (0.399) (0.044) (0.053) Gupta, K., Kumar, S., & Gulati, S. (2023). Drivers of
Observations 115,694 91,300 104,271 104,271 104,271 104,271 Corporate Investment in India: Assessing the Impact
R-squared 0.000 0.006 0.008 0.058 0.011 0.026
of Monetary Policy and COVID. South Asia Economic
Number of 14,655 14,655 14,655 14,655
Journal, 24(2), 216-251
firms
Firm FE YES YES YES YES Wang, J., Gochoco-Bautista, M. S., & Sotocinal, N. R.
Year FE YES NO NO
(2013). Corporate investments in Asian emerging
Robust standard errors in parentheses. *** p<0.01, ** p<0.05, * p<0.1
markets: Financial conditions, financial development,
Notes: 1. Export Firm is defined as firms with exports to sales ratio
higher than 30 per cent. and financial constraints. Asian Development Bank
2. Investment is defined as ratio of the annual change in fixed
asset with total fixed asset as at end of the financial year. Economics Working Paper Series, (346).
40
28-1891 58-4891 88-7891 19-0991 49-3991 79-6991 00-9991 30-2002 60-5002 90-8002 21-1102 51-4102 81-7102 12-0202 42-3202
Chart III.2.1: Investment trends
a. Gross Capital Formation b. Exports and Fixed Investment
(Per cent of nominal GDP) [Annual growth (%) in Fixed investment (y - axis),
Real exports (x - axis)]
20
15
10
y = 0.38x + 4.50
5
R² = 0.47
0
-5
-10
-10 010 20 30 40
Sources: Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI); and RBI staff estimates.Chapter III Demand and Output
quality of expenditure. During April-July 2025, this
Table III.4: Interest Coverage Ratio
ratio remained close to corresponding level of last
(Ratio)
Industry 2023-24 2024-25 2025- year (Chart III.5b). This reflects the government’s
26 continued thrust on fiscal consolidation without
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
compromising the quality of expenditure. Continued
Manufacturing 6.8 7.5 7.4 7.5 7.9 7.9 7.6 8.7 9.1
fiscal consolidation and improvement in the quality
Services
1.6 1.4 1.8 1.7 1.8 1.7 2.1 2.1 2.1
(non-IT) of government expenditure, along with strong
IT 44.5 43.2 41.2 44.1 42.9 45.6 40.9 44.0 44.3 macroeconomic fundamentals, have contributed to
Note: Data for Q1:2025-26 are based on results of 3,079 listed non-
India’s sovereign rating upgrade by S&P Global Ratings
government non-financial companies.
Source: RBI staff estimates. in August 2025- the first upgrade in 18 years.
III.1.3 Government Consumption On the revenue receipts front, the central
government’s gross tax revenue recorded a muted
Government final consumption expenditure grew
growth of 0.8 per cent during April-July 2025. Indirect
by 7.4 per cent (y-o-y) during Q1:2025-26, as against
tax revenue rose by 6.7 per cent, buoyed by higher
a contraction in the preceding quarter (Table III.1).
receipts from goods and services tax and union excise
Revenue expenditure of the central government
duties. Direct tax collections, on the other hand,
(excluding interest payments and major subsidies)
recorded double-digit growth during April-July 2025. recorded a decline of 4.0 per cent, mainly due to
This marks a significant turnaround from a modest contraction in personal income tax collections (Table
increase in Q4:2024-25 and a contraction in the III.5). Gross goods and services tax collections (Centre
corresponding period of the previous year. Capital plus States) expanded by 9.9 per cent during April-
expenditure registered a high growth of 32.8 per August 2025, underscoring the sustained momentum
cent in April-July (Chart III.5a). On an annual basis, in economic activity (Chart III.6). The central
the central government’s revenue expenditure to government has recently undertaken a detailed
capital outlay (RECO) ratio has been moderating since overhaul of the GST framework, encompassing three
2020-21, indicating sustained improvement in the pillars – structural reforms, rate rationalisation
Chart III.5: Centre’s Expenditure: April - July
a. Expenditure Growth b. Quality of Expenditure - Revenue Expenditure
(Y-o-y growth in per cent) to Capital Outlay (RECO)
70
(Ratio)
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
-20
Sources: Controller General of Accounts (CGA); and RBI staff estimates.
4411
71-6102 81-7102 91-8102 02-9102 12-0202 22-1202 32-2202 42-3202 52-4202 62-5202
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
Revenue Expenditure excluding interest payments and major subsidies
Capital Expenditure
71-6102 81-7102 91-8102 02-9102 12-0202 22-1202 32-2202 42-3202 52-4202 62-5202
32.8
12.1
4.9Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Table III.5: Central Government’s Tax Collections
Item ₹ thousand crore Per cent
BE Actuals Per cent to BE Growth Rate
2023-24 2024-25 Apr-Jul Apr-Jul Apr-Jul Apr-Jul Apr-Jul Apr-Jul
2024 2025 2024 2025 2024 2025
A. Direct taxes 2,207 2,520 596 572 27.0 22.7 35.9 -4.0
Of which
1. Corporation tax 1,020 1,082 185 199 18.1 18.4 4.8 7.6
2. Income tax 1,150 1,360 394 355 34.3 26.1 53.4 -9.9
B. Indirect taxes 1,633 1,750 488 521 29.9 29.8 7.1 6.7
Of which
1. Total GST 1,067 1,183 341 375 32.0 31.7 9.5 9.8
2. Custom duties 238 240 68 61 28.4 25.2 3.8 -10.4
3. Union excise duties 319 317 77 84 24.1 26.5 0.8 9.3
C. Gross tax revenue 3,840 4,270 1084 1093 28.2 25.6 21.3 0.8
D. Assignment to States/UTs 1,247 1,422 367 429 29.4 30.1 18.5 16.9
E. Net tax revenue 2,583 2,837 715 662 27.7 23.3 22.8 -7.5
Note: BE: Budget Estimates.
Sources: Union Budget Documents; and Controller General of Accounts (CGA).
and ease of living. The GST rate structure has been 2025, mainly due to the large surplus transfer of ₹2.69
converted mainly into two slabs of 5 per cent and 18 lakh crore by the Reserve Bank of India in May 2025
per cent with a special 40 per cent rate for luxury and (Chart III.7). Centre’s gross fiscal deficit stood at 29.9
sin goods.4
per cent of its full year budget estimates (BE) during
Non-tax revenue of the central government posted April-July 2025, higher than 17.2 per cent recorded in
a high growth of 33.7 per cent during April-July the same period last year.
Chart III.6: GST Collections (Centre plus States) Chart III.7: Centre’s Non-tax Revenue: April-July
(₹ thousand crore) (₹ thousand crore)
250 450
225 400
200
186 350
98
175
300
150
250
125
200
100
150 294
75
50 100
25 50
0 0 12
Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar 2022-23 2023-2024 2024-25 2025-26
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26 Interest receipts Dividends and profits Others
Sources: Press information bureau (PIB); and GST website. Source: Controller General of Accounts (CGA).
4 https://www.pib.gov.in/PressReleasePage.aspx?PRID=2156708
42Chapter III Demand and Output
Table III.6: State Government Finances - Chart III.8: States’ Capital Outlay
Key Deficit Indicators (Ratio, left scale; per cent of GDP, right scale)
7 4
(Per cent to GDP)
2023-24 2024-25 (PA) 2025-26 (BE) 6
3.0
Revenue deficit 0.3 0.6 0.2 3
5 4.9
Gross fiscal deficit 2.9 3.3 3.3
4
Primary deficit 1.2 1.7 1.5
2
Notes: 1. Data pertain to 31 States/UTs. 3
2. PA: Provisional Accounts; BE: Budget Estimates.
Sources: Budget Documents of State/UTs; and Comptroller and Auditor 2
1
General (CAG) of India.
1
The consolidated gross fiscal deficit of State
governments and Union Territories is budgeted 0 0
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 (PA) 2025-26 (BE)
at 3.3 per cent of GDP for 2025–26, same as in
Capital outlay (right scale)
the provisional estimates of 2024-25 (Table III.6). Revenue Expenditure to Captial Outlay Ratio
Notes: 1. Data pertain to 31 States/UTs.
State governments continue to prioritise capital
2. PA: Provisional Accounts; BE: Budget Estimates.
Sources: Budget Documents of States/UTs; and CAG.
expenditure, as evidenced by an improvement in the
Revenue Expenditure to Capital Outlay (RECO) ratio,
of their budget estimates, were higher compared to
which moderated to 4.9 in 2025-26 (BE) from 6.2 in
the corresponding period of last year, primarily due to
2022-2023 (Chart III.8). The states’ capital expenditure
deceleration in revenue receipts growth (Chart III.9a).
is also supported by the central government through
The slowdown in receipts was led by moderation in
the ‘Scheme for Special Assistance to States for Capital
the growth of state goods and service tax and sales
Investment’, under which ₹1.5 lakh crore has been
tax/Value Added Tax (VAT) collections, even as state
allocated for 2025-26.
excise duties and stamp duties and registration fees
As per the available data for April-July 2025, the key remained robust. Non-tax revenues increased at a
deficit indicators of state governments, as a proportion slower pace relative to the previous year and grants
Chart III.9: States’ Key Fiscal Performance Indicators: April-July
a. Deficit Indicators b. Revenue and Expenditure
(As per cent of budget estimates) (Y-o-y growth in per cent)
90 20
81.4
15
75 11.5
9.8
10
60
5.5
5
45
0
30 22.7
18.9 -5
15
-10
0 -15
Revenue deficit Gross fiscal deficit Primary deficit Revenue receipts Revenue expenditure Capital expenditure
2024-25 2025-26 2024-25 over 2023-24 2025-26 over 2024-25
Note: Data pertain to 24 States/UTs.
Source: CAG.
4433Monetary Policy Report October 2025
from the central government contracted further.
Chart III.10: Merchandise Trade
On the expenditure front, revenue expenditure
(Y-o-y growth in per cent, left scale; US$ billion, right scale)
growth remained robust and capital expenditure 30 30
recorded a sharp upturn, aided partly by the low base
20 20
(Chart III.9b).
10 10
In the Union Budget for 2025-26, gross and net market
0 0
borrowings through dated securities were provided
at ₹14.8 lakh crore and ₹11.5 lakh crore, respectively. -10 -10
During the H1:2025-26 (up to September 26, 2025),
-20 -20
gross market borrowings raised by the centre stood
-30 -30
at ₹7.95 lakh crore, constituting 53.6 per cent of the
annual budgeted amount (Table III.7). The weighted -40 -40
average cost of the issuances at 6.6 per cent was lower
than 7.0 per cent in 2024-25. The weighted average
maturity of the issuances declined to 19.6 years from
Source: DGCI&S.
20.7 years in the previous fiscal. During H2:2025-
26, the centre is expected to raise ₹6.8 lakh crore US$120.5 billion in the same period last year (Chart
through dated securities. States mobilised ₹4.7 lakh III.10). Services exports maintained buoyancy with
crore through gross market borrowings during H1 double digit growth during April-July 2025. According
(up to September 26, 2025), as against the indicative to provisional estimates released by the National
calendar amount of ₹5.6 lakh crore. In order to Statistical Office (NSO), real exports and imports of
bridge temporary mismatches between receipts and goods and services grew by 6.3 per cent and 10.9 per
expenditures, the Ways and Means Advances (WMA) cent, respectively, in Q1:2025–26 (Table III.1).
limit for the central government was fixed at ₹1.5 lakh
The increase in merchandise exports during H1:2025-
crore for H1:2025-26 and has been revised to ₹50,000
26 (April-August) was primarily driven by strong
crore for H2.
performances in electronic goods, engineering goods,
III.1.4 External Demand pharmaceuticals, marine products, and readymade
Amidst persisting global trade uncertainty, India’s garments. On the other hand, petroleum products,
merchandise exports exhibited uneven performance. iron ore, oil meals, cotton yarn, fabrics, made ups, and
During April-August 2025, merchandise exports (in handloom products dragged down the overall export
US dollar terms) registered an expansion of 2.5 per growth. Exports of petroleum, oil, and lubricants
cent, while merchandise imports rose by 2.1 per cent. (POL) declined by 19.4 per cent y-o-y, amounting to
The merchandise trade deficit during April-August US$ 26.1 billion during April-August 2025. In contrast,
2025 widened marginally to US$122.4 billion from non-POL, non-gems and jewellery exports posted
44
42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
6.7
-10.1
-26.5
Trade balance (right scale) Exports Imports
Non-oil non-gold imports Non-oil exports
Table III.7: Government Market Borrowings
(₹ crore)
2024-25 2025-26 (till September 26, 2025)
Centre States Total Centre States Total
Net borrowings 11,62,879 7,53,345 19,16,224 5,88,299 3,21,992 9,10,291
Gross borrowings 14,00,697 10,73,310 24,74,007 7,95,000 4,66,692 12,61,692
Sources: Government of India (GoI); and RBI staff estimates.Chapter III Demand and Output
Chart III.11: Merchandise Exports
a. Exports Growth - Relative Contribution b. Major Drivers of Exports in 2025-26 (April - August)
(Percentage points, left scale; per cent, right scale) Relative Contribution
(Percentage points)
Electronic goods (40.7)
Engineering goods (5.8)
Drugs and pharmaceuticals (7.3)
Marine products (16)
RMG of all textiles (5.8)
Cashew (-6.3)
Cotton yarn/fabs./made-ups,
handloom products etc. (-0.6)
Oil meals (-17.8)
Iron ore (-42.6)
Petroleum products (-19.4)
Non-POL exports POL exports
Merchandise exports (per cent) World trade (right scale) -6 -4 -2 0 2 4
Notes: 1. World trade data is available up to June 2025.
2. Figures in parentheses in chart b are y-o-y percent change in exports of the commodity during the period.
Sources: DGCI&S; CPB Netherlands; and RBI staff estimates.
a robust growth of 7.8 per cent, reaching US$ 146.7 equipment, pulses, and pearls, precious and semi-
billion during the same period (Chart III.11). precious stones declined, dampening overall growth
in imports. Petroleum, oil, and lubricants (POL)
The growth in merchandise imports during H1:2025-
imports contracted marginally by 0.1 per cent to US$
26 (April-August) was primarily driven by imports of
electronic goods, chemical materials and products, 78.1 billion during this period. On the contrary, non-
machinery (both electrical and non-electrical), POL, non-gold imports saw a robust expansion of 7.1
fertilisers, and non-ferrous metals. On the other hand, per cent, reaching US$ 211.5 billion, indicating strong
imports of gold, coal, coke and briquettes, transport domestic demand (Chart III.12).
4455
5
poT
5 mottoB
30 6
25 5
20 4
15 3
10
2
5
1
0
0
-5
-10 -1
-15 -2
-20 -3
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q guA-luJ
10.3
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Chart III.12: Merchandise Imports
a. Imports Growth - Relative Contribution b. Major Drivers of Imports in 2025-26 (April - August)
(Percentage points) Relative Contribution
50
(Percentage points)
40
30
20
10
0
-10
-20
Note: Figures in parentheses in chart b are y-o-y percent change in imports of the commodity during the period.
Sources: DGCI&S; and RBI staff estimates.
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 1Q guA-luJ
Electronic goods (17.1)
Chemical material and
products (82.2)
Machinery, electrical and
non-electrical (14.6)
Fertilisers, crude and
manufactured (53.0)
Non-ferrous metals (9.3)
Pearls, precious and
semi-precious stones (-2.2)
Pulses (-52.3)
Transport equipment (-9.8)
Coal, coke and briquettes,
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26 etc. (-19.5)
Gold (-30.7)
POL imports Gold imports
Non-POL non-gold imports Merchandise imports (per cent)
5
poT
5
mottoB
-1.4
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3Monetary Policy Report October 2025
India’s services exports remained buoyant during On the financial account, gross inward foreign direct
April-July 2025, registering a robust growth of 10.1 investment (FDI) was resilient in 2024-25, expanding
per cent, supported by sustained global demand for by 13.1 per cent to US$ 80.6 billion. On a net basis,
Indian services (Chart III.13). The expansion was FDI inflows moderated significantly to US$ 1.0
primarily driven by strong performance in software billion, largely due to elevated repatriations and
outward FDI. Global investment sentiment has also
and business services. Reflecting this resilience,
weakened, as evidenced by a contraction in global FDI
India retained its position among the top five
flows5 for the second consecutive year in 2024. During
service-exporting nations in terms of export growth
April-July 2025, gross FDI inflows remained strong
in Q1:2025-26. Services imports growth moderated
at US$ 37.7 billion, underscoring India’s continued
to 1.5 per cent in Q1:2025-26 but accelerated to 8.5
appeal as a preferred investment destination. Net
per cent in July.
FDI inflows at US$ 10.8 billion during this period
On a balance of payments basis, India’s current
was also higher as compared to US$ 3.5 billion a year
account deficit (CAD) stood at 0.2 per cent of GDP
ago, primarily on account of a rise in grows inflows
in Q1:2025-26, as against 0.9 per cent in Q1:2024-
and a moderation in FDI repatriation. Singapore, the
25. This improvement in CAD was underpinned
United States, Mauritius, the United Arab Emirates
by robust services exports and strong inflow of
and the Netherlands emerged as the top sources of
remittances that significantly offset the high
FDI in April-July 2025, collectively accounting for 76.0
merchandise trade deficit (Chart III.14). Amidst per cent of total inflows. Manufacturing, computer
heightened global uncertainty, India continues to services, business services, communication services,
receive robust private remittances (US$ 35.3 billion and electricity generation and distribution attracted
during Q1:2025-26) and remain the largest recipient the bulk of FDI equity inflows, comprising 74.2 per
of private remittances in the world. cent of the total.
Chart III.13: Services Trade Chart III.14: Components of
(Y-o-y growth in per cent) Current Account Deficit
50 (In US$ billion )
100
40 80
60
30 40
20
20 0
-2.4
-20
10.3
10 -40
8.5
-60
0 -80
-100
-10 -120
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2* Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Exports Imports Goods Services Income
Transfers Total current account deficit
Note: * Data is for July 2025
Source: RBI. Source: RBI.
5 Excluding financial flows from European conduit economies with elevated volatility.
46Chapter III Demand and Output
Table III.8: Net Foreign Direct and Portfolio Investment
(US$ billion)
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2
Net FDI 4.7 -0.8 4.0 2.3 6.2 -2.8 -2.8 0.4 5.7 5.0#
Net FPI 16.1 5.3 11.7 11.6 0.9 19.8 -11.4 -6.0 2.5 -5.5*
Notes: #: Data is for July 2025.
*: Net FPI data for Q1:2025-26 are based on balance of payments (BoP) statistics of RBI, while data for Q2:2025-26 is sourced from daily data,
published by NSDL; and data is up to September 26
Sources: National Securities Depository Limited (NSDL); and RBI.
Persistent geopolitical tensions, rise in global trade III.2 Aggregate Supply
barriers, heightened policy uncertainty, and elevated
Aggregate supply – measured by real gross value added
U.S. bond yields have collectively dampened foreign
at basic prices – expanded by 7.6 per cent in Q1:2025-26
investors sentiment towards emerging market
(6.8 per cent in the preceding quarter) – marking a six-
economies, especially in equity inflows in recent
quarter high supported by a recovery in manufacturing
years. Reflecting this sentiment, foreign portfolio
and buoyancy in services. Manufacturing and all four
investment in India recorded a net outflow of US$
major subsectors of services recorded strong growth
3.0 billion during H1:2025-26 (up to September 26),
and cumulatively contributed around 94.3 per cent to
mainly owing to outflows in the equity segment.
total gross value added (Table III.9). The seasonally
Notably, FPI flows had turned positive in Q1:2025-26
adjusted momentum of gross value added moderated
after two consecutive quarters of outflows, indicating
in Q1 from the previous quarter (Chart III.15b).
a brief recovery in investor confidence (Table III.8).
III.2.1 Agriculture
This momentum reversed in Q2 (up to September 26),
as global risk aversion intensified, compounded by Agriculture sector prospects remain favourable,
U.S. tariffs. supported by above normal monsoons, adequate
reservoir levels, and supportive policy interventions.
External commercial borrowing inflows decreased
Real gross value added in the agriculture, forestry, and
to US$ 3.7 billion during April-August 2025 from
fishing sector expanded by 3.7 per cent in Q1:2025-26,
US$ 4.9 billion a year earlier. Of these borrowings,
lower than 5.4 per cent in Q4:2024-25 but higher than
approximately 60.6 per cent were hedged, reflecting a
1.5 per cent in the same period of last year. Southwest
prudent approach in the wake of high global financial
monsoon commenced eight days ahead of its normal
volatility. Net accretions to non-resident deposits
schedule,6 and gained significant momentum, covering
during April-July 2025 moderated to US$ 4.7 billion
the entire country by June 29. As of September 26,
from US$ 5.8 billion in the same period last year.
2025, the cumulative rainfall was 7 per cent above
This decline was driven mainly by reduced inflows
the Long Period Average (Chart III.16a). Regionally,
in Foreign Currency Non-Resident Bank [FCNR(B)]
rainfall exceeded the Long Period Average across all
deposits. As of September 19, 2025, India’s foreign
regions, except in East and Northeast India.
exchange reserves stood at US$ 702.6 billion, sufficient
to cover 11.5 months of annualised merchandise Kharif sowing recorded an increase of 0.6 per cent
imports (on a balance of payments basis) or 95.4 per as on September 26, 2025 over the last year, on the
back of good progress of southwest monsoon and also
cent of the country’s outstanding external debt as of
exceeding season’s normal sown area. The rise in kharif
end-March 2025.
6 https://internal.imd.gov.in/press_release/20250524_pr_3998.pdf
4477Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Table III.9: Real Gross Value Added Growth
(Y-o-y, per cent)
Sector 2023-24 2024-25 Weighted 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Contribution
(FRE) (PE) 2022-23 2023-24 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
Agriculture, forestry and fishing 2.7 4.6 0.4 0.7 5.7 3.7 1.5 0.9 1.5 4.1 6.6 5.4 3.7
Industry 11.0 4.5 2.4 1.0 6.6 15.3 12.6 9.9 7.8 2.1 3.5 4.7 5.8
Mining and quarrying 3.2 2.7 0.1 -0.2 4.1 4.1 4.7 0.8 6.6 -0.4 1.3 2.5 -3.1
Manufacturing 12.3 4.5 2.1 5.4 7.3 17.0 14.0 11.3 7.6 2.2 3.6 4.8 7.7
Electricity, gas, water supply and
8.6 5.9 0.2 -0.5 4.1 11.7 10.1 8.8 10.2 3.0 5.1 5.4 0.5
other utilities
Services 9.2 7.5 5.8 4.8 12.1 8.3 8.5 8.0 7.2 7.4 7.5 7.9 9.0
Construction 10.4 9.4 0.9 8.7 9.2 14.6 10.0 8.7 10.1 8.4 7.9 10.8 7.6
Trade, hotels, transport,
7.5 6.1 1.4 -7.3 11.0 5.4 8.0 6.2 5.4 6.1 6.7 6.0 8.6
communication
Financial, real estate and
10.3 7.2 2.4 -1.3 15.0 8.3 8.4 9.0 6.6 7.2 7.1 7.8 9.5
professional services
Public administration, defence
8.8 8.9 1.1 0.8 9.3 8.9 8.4 8.7 9.0 8.9 8.9 8.7 9.8
and other services
GVA at basic prices 8.6 6.4 8.6 6.4 9.9 9.2 8.0 7.3 6.5 5.8 6.5 6.8 7.6
Note: FRE: First revised estimates; PE: Provisional estimates.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
acreage was primarily led by rice, maize, urad and rainfall index (PRN) stood at 110 per cent,
sugarcane (Chart III.16b). As of September 25, 2025, indicating relatively higher rainfall in major
foodgrain producing states (Chart III.16d). Adequate
reservoir levels stood at 90 per cent of total capacity,
soil moisture conditions coupled with healthy
exceeding the levels recorded a year ago as well as
reservoir storage are expected to boost the Rabi
the decadal average (Chart III.16c). Furthermore,
prospects.
as of September 26, 2025, the production-weighted
Chart III.15: Gross Value Added Growth and its Constituents
a. Weighted Contribution of the Components b. GVA Growth and Momentum
to GVA Growth (Per cent)
(Percentage points) 16
12
12
10
8 7.6 7.6
8
6
6.9
4 4
2
0
0
-2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 -4
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
-8
Public administration, defence and other services
Financial, real estate & professional services -12
Trade, hotels, transport, communications Construction Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
Electricity, gas and water supply Manufacturing 2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025
-26
Mining & Quarrying Agriculture
GVA (y-o-y, per cent) y-o-y q-o-q SAAR
Note: SAAR – Seasonally adjusted annualised rate.
Sources: NSO; and RBI staff estimates.
48Chapter III Demand and Output
Chart III.16: Progress of Rainfall, Reservoir Level and Kharif Sowing
a. Cumulative Weekly Progress of Southwest b. Kharif Sown Area (as on September 26)
Monsoon Rainfall$ (Lakh hectare, left scale; per cent, right scale)
(Deviation from LPA in per cent)
30 7.0 10
-10
-30
-50
-70
Normal (Full Season)* 2024-25 2025-26
2023 2024 2025 Y-o-y growth (right scale)
c. Reservoir level (September 25, 2025) d. Production-weighted Rainfall Index (PRN)
(Per cent of live capacity at FRL) (June 1 - September 26)
120
(Index in per cent)
100 8790 120 107 110
80 77 100
80
60
60
40
40
20 20
0 0
Northern Eastern Western Central Southern All India 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025
Average of last 10 years 2024 2025 IMD Index PRN
Notes: *Normal area is the average of 5 years - 2019-20 to 2023-24.
$Rainfall for 2025 is till September 26;
FRL: Full Reservoir Level; PRN: Production-weighted Rainfall Index
Sources: India Meteorological Department (IMD); Central Water Commission (CWC); Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers' Welfare (MoAFW); and RBI staff estimates.
According to the third advance estimates of crops in the previous quarter (7.8 per cent a year ago). This
production for 2024-25, total foodgrain output was primarily driven by a rebound in manufacturing
increased by 6.5 per cent to 3,540 lakh tonnes. activity with improving profit margins due to low
Except for sugarcane, cotton, and jute and mesta, all input costs. Mining and quarrying contracted, while
major crops have recorded an increase in production electricity, gas, water supply, and other utility services
(Table III.10). increased marginally during Q1 (Chart III.17).
The Government announced Minimum Support
Index of industrial production (IIP) expanded by
Prices for kharif crops for the 2025-26 marketing
2.0 per cent during April-July 2025 (Table III.11).
season, increasing in the range of 1.0-13.9 per cent.7
As alluded to earlier, the expansion in industrial
The relative changes in Minimum Support Price are
production was mainly driven by higher growth
expected to promote crop diversification, address
in manufacturing output, which registered a six-
demand-supply imbalances, and foster sustainable
month high in July. Mining and quarrying output
agricultural practices.
contracted during April-July 2025, partly owing to
III.2.2 Industry monsoon-related disruptions. Electricity generation
Gross value added of the industrial sector expanded by remained muted, due to lower than usual summer
5.8 per cent in Q1:2025-26, as compared to 4.7 per cent temperature. Within manufacturing, production of
7 https://desagri.gov.in/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/MSP-Notification-KMS-2025-26-English.pdf
4499
1
keeW
2
keeW
3
keeW
4
keeW
1
keeW
2
keeW
3
keeW
4
keeW
1
keeW
2
keeW
3
keeW
4
keeW
5
keeW
1
keeW
2
keeW
3
keeW
4
keeW
500 10
400 6.6 6
300 3.2 200 1.4 0.8 -2.6 2
-2 100
0 -5.2 -6
June July August September
eciR sesluP slaerec
esraoC
sdeesliO nottoC enacraguSMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Table III.10: Agricultural Production in 2024-25
(Lakh tonnes)
Crop 2023-24 2024-25 Variation in 2024-25 (Per cent)
Final SAE TAE Over Final 2023-24 Over SAE 2024-25*
Foodgrains 3323.0 3309.2 3539.6 6.5 1.3
Kharif 1557.7 1663.9 1680.7 7.9 1.0
Rabi 1600.1 1645.3 1672.2 4.5 1.6
Summer 165.2 - 186.8 13.0 -
Rice 1378.3 1364.4 1490.7 8.2 0.8
Wheat 1132.9 1154.3 1175.1 3.7 1.8
Coarse cereals 569.4 560.3 621.4 9.1 2.2
Pulses 242.5 230.2 252.4 4.1 -0.2
Oilseeds 396.7 416.7 426.1 7.4 -0.7
Sugarcane 4531.6 4350.8 4501.2 -0.7 3.5
Cotton # 325.2 294.3 306.9 -5.6 4.3
Jute & Mesta ## 96.9 86.2 87.5 -9.8 1.4
Notes: *: SAE covers production of Kharif and Rabi crops only. Growth is calculated accordingly.
#: Lakh bales of 170 kgs each; ##: Lakh bales of 180 kgs each. SAE: Second Advance Estimates. TAE: Third Advance Estimates.
Sources: MoAFW; and GoI.
basic metal electrical equipment, motor vehicles, goods and consumer non-durable goods contracted
trailers and semi-trailers, machinery and equipment, during this period.
and fabricated metal products were the growth
Gross value added of electricity, gas, water supply, and
drivers, while chemicals, beverages, printing, paper,
other utility services grew modestly in Q1:2025-26,
leather, and other manufacturing products acted as compared to a double-digit growth last year, mainly
a drag. In terms of use-based classification, capital, due to a decline in electricity generation. Conventional
infrastructure, intermediate, and consumer durables power generation declined during April-August 2025,
rose during April-July. On the other hand, primary reflecting both reduced demand in the face of subdued
Chart III.17: Industrial GVA Growth
a. Weighted Contribution to Industrial GVA Growth b. Manufacturing Sector Profitability
(Percentage points) (Y-o-y growth in per cent)
16 60
12 45
8 30
5.8
15.0
4 15
0 0
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26 -15
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
Electricity, gas, water supply and other utility services
2022-23 2023-24 2024-25 2025
Manufacturing -26
Mining and quarrying Cost of raw materials Staff cost Interest expenses
Industry (y-o-y) Depreciation Profit before tax
Note: Data for Q1:2025-26 in chart b are based on results of 1,736 listed private manufacturing companies.
Sources: Capitaline and RBI staff calculations.
50Chapter III Demand and Output
Table III.11: Industrial Sector y-o-y growth
(Y-o-y, Per cent)
Indicators 2024-25 2025-26
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Jul Aug Sep
1 PMI: Manufacturing (>50 indicates growth over 58.2 57.4 56.8 57.4 58.1 59.1 59.3 58.5*
previous month)
2 Index of Industrial Production (IIP) 5.5 2.7 4.1 4.0 2.0 3.5
3 IIP: Manufacturing 4.3 3.3 4.5 4.2 3.3 5.4
4 IIP: Primary goods 6.9 1.6 3.0 4.1 -1.4 -1.7
5 IIP: Capital goods 3.0 4.9 7.4 7.0 9.8 5.0
6 IIP: Intermediate goods 3.5 4.8 5.3 3.4 5.0 5.8
7 IIP: Infrastructure and construction goods 8.1 3.9 7.0 8.1 6.0 11.9
8 IIP: Consumer durables 10.7 6.6 9.0 5.9 2.6 7.7
9 IIP: Consumer non-durables -0.2 -2.2 -1.6 -2.0 -1.5 0.5
10 Eight Core Industries (ECI) 6.3 2.4 4.9 4.3 1.5 3.7 6.3
11 ECI: Steel 8.4 4.3 7.8 6.8 7.2 16.6 14.2
12 ECI: Cement 0.4 3.2 8.7 12.4 8.0 11.6 6.1
13 Electricity demand 11.8 12.6 12.8 11.5 8.5 2.6 3.8
Production of Automobiles
14 Passenger vehicles 6.2 -0.5 3.3 6.4 4.9 0.1# -4.1#
15 Two wheelers 19.6 12.5 8.0 5.8 0.7 12.3 10.0
16 Three wheelers 9.5 6.3 -2.6 9.5 9.8 24.0 15.8
17 Tractors 1.0 3.2 12.1 11.7 12.7 11.5 9.4
Notes: #: Doesn’t include Tata Motors; and * : Flash PMI release.
Sources: CMIE; CEIC; HSBC, S&P Global; Office of Economic Advisor; NSO; SIAM; TMA; and RBI staff estimates.
summer and strong expansion in renewable energy electricity demand declined across all regions in Q1,
sources. Given India’s continued thrust on greener with the sharpest drop in the northern region, as the
energy, renewable energy sources expanded by 24.8 early monsoon kept power demand low. Demand in
per cent during April-August, accounting for about 18 all the regions, except the northern region, picked up
per cent of total electricity generation. Region-wise, during July-August (Table III.12).
Table III.12: Electricity Generation and Consumption
(Y-o-y, per cent)
Indicators 2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Jul Aug
Electricity Generation
Thermal 2.1 14.7 14.3 10.1 12.0 -1.4 0.0 0.4 -8.1 -4.7 0.4
Nuclear -6.4 16.7 10.0 -2.2 28.3 18.4 11.4 16.9 11.3 -5.5 -25.2
Hydro -10.0 -13.4 -30.7 -20.2 1.3 6.2 28.3 19.8 13.4 23.4 9.0
Renewables 8.1 21.9 7.0 5.6 7.0 7.3 17.2 22.8 24.8 26.4 22.7
Electricity Consumption
Northern region -8.9 8.4 6.0 8.3 22.0 3.1 9.5 1.6 -3.0 -5.4 1.5
Western region 3.5 20.8 7.7 7.1 5.5 -6.7 0.4 4.4 -0.3 7.6 9.3
Southern region 10.7 16.3 18.2 9.3 3.3 0.8 -2.3 3.1 -1.3 9.5 -0.9
Eastern region 4.9 6.6 9.2 7.9 9.8 0.6 3.9 3.9 -1.7 2.0 7.3
All-India 1.5 13.4 9.9 8.1 10.2 -0.7 2.6 3.2 -1.5 2.6 3.8
Sources: Central Electricity Authority (CEA); and Power System Operation Corporation Limited (POSOCO).
5511Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Manufacturing purchasing managers index (PMI) The momentum was driven by an upsurge in trade,
signalled further improvement in overall business hotels, transport, communication, and services related
conditions, rising to 59.2 in July-August 2025 from 58.1 to broadcasting; financial, real estate and professional
in Q1:2025-26, supported by strong domestic orders. services; and public administration, defence and other
Business expectations for manufacturing exhibited services (Chart III.19a).
continued optimism, while the new export orders Construction activity, which is labour-intensive,
index recorded a moderation, displaying the US tariffs- recorded strong growth in Q1:2025-26, partly owing
related impact. India's flash manufacturing PMI stood to higher government's infrastructure spending.
at 58.5 in September, well above its long-run average High frequency indicators of construction – steel
(Chart III.18a). consumption and cement production – remained
steady during July-August (Chart III.19b).
To enhance competitiveness and ease of doing
business, the government has implemented a Real gross value added of trade, hotels, transport,
simplified two slab GST 2.0 with effect from communication, and services relating to broadcasting
September 22, 2025.8 In addition, the Government has inched up by 8.6 per cent in Q1:2025-26 (6.0 per cent
announced a host of other structural reforms which in Q4:2024-25). Trade activity continued to exhibit
would improve productivity, competitiveness, and resilience in Q2, as indicated by robust growth in
boost potential of the industrial sector (Table III.13). issuances of e-way bills and healthy expansion in
GST collections during July-August. Indicators of
III.2.3 Services
transportation services displayed a mixed picture in
Services sector remained the main driver of gross Q2 – toll collections remained robust in July-August,
value added in the economy, recording an eight- while domestic air passenger traffic contracted during
quarter high growth of 9.0 per cent in Q1:2025-26 and the same period. Air and port cargo traffic remained in
contributed more than three-fourth to overall growth. expansionary zone with modest growth in July.
Chart III.18: PMI Manufacturing and Services
a. PMI Manufacturing b. PMI Services
(Index) (Index)
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
PMI manufacturing New orders PMI services New business
New export orders No change New export business No change
Future output Business expectations
Notes: PMI>50: Expansion; PMI< 50: Contraction; and * Flash PMI release.
Source: HSBC, S&P Global.
8 https://www.pib.gov.in/PressReleasePage.aspx?PRID=2163555
52
42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
*52-peS
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
*52-peS
61.6
58.5Chapter III Demand and Output
Table III.13: Key Government Initiatives to Support Industrial Growth and Energy Self-Reliance
Measures Details and Purpose
National Deepwater Exploration To harness India’s offshore energy resources, boosting energy self-reliance and reducing dependence on foreign
Mission fuel imports, advancing India’s energy security.
Task Force for Next-Generation To evaluate and streamline laws, rules, and procedures related to economic activities, reducing compliance costs
Reforms and fostering innovation, entrepreneurship, and growth for startups, MSMEs, and entrepreneurs.
Opening Nuclear Sector to To enable private sector participation in nuclear energy and technology, expanding opportunities in energy and
Private Players technological innovation.
A ₹1 lakh crore employment scheme providing ₹15,000 to newly employed youth, aimed at benefiting 3 crore
PM Viksit Bharat Rozgar Yojana
young Indians and supporting inclusive economic development.
National Critical Minerals To explore 1,200 sites to secure minerals vital for energy, industry, and defence, ensuring access to critical
Mission resources for strategic sectors.
Made in India Semiconductor To launch the country’s first domestically manufactured semiconductor chip by year-end, marking a major step in
Chip strengthening domestic technology manufacturing.
High-Powered Demography To address national security challenges arising from illegal migration and demographic imbalances in border areas,
Mission thereby enhancing border security and stability.
Source: Press Information Bureau (PIB).
Financial, real estate and professional services rose by that financial services have kept the momentum
9.5 per cent in Q1:2025-26, contributing a major part during Q2.
to service sector growth (43.8 per cent) as well as to Corporate performance in services sector strengthened
aggregate growth (33.7 per cent). Bank credit growth in Q1:2025-26. Operating profit of information
technology firms improved to 5.4 per cent during
improved during Q2 from the last quarter, while
Q1 from 2.4 per cent in the previous quarter due to
bank deposit growth witnessed moderation. Life
moderated growth in staff costs. Non-IT services
insurance premium expanded at a robust pace in July,
firms recorded robust operating profit of 11.3 per
while non-life insurance premium registered modest cent during Q1, despite having moderated from the
growth (Table III.14). All these indicators suggest previous quarter (Chart III.20).
Chart III.19: Services Sector
a. Growth of Service Sector Components b. Construction Indicators
(Y-o-y growth in per cent) (Y-o-y growth in per cent)
25
20
20
15
9.8 15 10
5 10
0 5
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26 0
Construction
-5
Trade, hotels, transport, communication and services related to
broadcasting
Financial, real estate & professional services
Public administration, defence and other services Finished steel consumption Cement production
Sources: NSO; Office of Economic Adviser; and Joint Plant Committee.
5533
42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
9.5
8.6
7.6 10.0
6.1Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Table III.14: Services Sector y-o-y growth
(Y-o-y, per cent)
Indicators 2024-25 2025-26
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Jul Aug Sep
1 PMI: Services (>50 indicates growth over previous month) 60.5 59.6 58.7 58.0 59.3 60.5 62.9 61.6*
Construction
2 Steel consumption 15.3 11.8 7.8 11.9 7.9 7.3 10.0
3 Cement production 0.4 3.2 8.7 12.4 8.0 11.6 6.1
Trade, Hotels, Transport, Communication and Services related to Broadcasting
4 Commercial vehicle sales 3.7 -11.0 1.2 1.5 -0.6
5 Domestic air passenger traffic 5.6 7.2 11.4 12.0 5.3 -2.5 -0.5
6 Domestic air cargo 7.1 7.6 4.6 3.1 6.6 4.8 7.1
7 International air cargo 18.4 21.9 15.0 1.3 4.7 4.2 4.5
8 Freight traffic 5.1 0.4 1.5 -0.4 2.4 0.0
9 Port cargo 3.9 6.2 -1.7 9.0 5.6 4.0 2.5
10 Toll collection: volume 5.6 7.6 9.8 15.1 16.2 14.8 16.1
11 Petroleum consumption 3.9 1.0 5.4 -1.8 0.5 -3.9 2.6
12 GST E-way bill 16.0 16.8 16.9 19.4 20.5 25.8 22.4
13 GST revenue 10.1 8.9 8.3 10.4 11.8 7.5 6.5
Financial, Real Estate and Professional Services
14 Credit outstanding 13.9# 13.0 11.2 11.0 9.5 10.0 10.0 10.4
15 Bank deposits 10.6# 11.5 9.8 10.3 10.1 10.2 10.2 9.5
16 Life insurance premium 22.9 16.5 -6.6 -4.3 4.3 22.4 -5.2
17 Non-life insurance premium 13.5 1.8 10.8 1.7 8.8 2.6 1.6
Notes: #: Excluding impact of merger; * : Flash PMI release.
Sources: CEIC; NSO; HSBC, S&P Global; MOSPI; Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India (IRDAI); and RBI staff estimates.
Real estate activity displayed buoyancy in Q1:2025- duty collections of state governments (Chart III.21a).
26 as reflected in robust registration and stamp All-India housing prices recorded a modest growth
in Q4:2024-25, with prices declining in Delhi
Chart III.20: Operating Profit Growth (Chart III.21b). Public administration, defence, and
(Y-o-y growth in per cent)
other services (PADO) grew at a 12-quarter high of
40
9.8 per cent in Q1. The centre’s revenue expenditure,
35
excluding interest payments and subsidies, expanded
30
by 18.6 per cent during July-August. Growth in other
25
services like health, education and other personal
20
services remained strong, alongside a recovery in
15
11.3 government consumption in Q1.
10
5.4
Services PMI indicated strong expansion, as it, rose
5
to 61.7 in July-August 2025 from an average of 59.3
0
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
in Q1:2025-26. The strong reading of services PMI
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26
was supported by robust demand and new business
Services (IT) Services (non-IT)
activity (Table III.14). The composite PMI index inched
Note: Results are based on 2,951 listed non-government non-financial companies
for Q1:2025-26. up from 60.0 in Q1 to 62.1 in Q2 (up to August). PMI
Source: RBI staff estimates.
manufacturing and PMI services readings for India
54Chapter III Demand and Output
Chart III.21: Housing Sector
a. Registration and Stamp Duties b. Housing Price Index
(Y-o-y growth in per cent) (Y-o-y growth in per cent)
16 16
14
14
12
12 10
9.9
10 8
6
8
4
3.1
6 2
0
4
-2
2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
0 2023-24 2024-25
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
Mumbai Delhi Bengaluru
2023-24 2024-25 2025-26 Chennai All India
Sources: CAG; and RBI.
have remained the highest globally since July 2022 resilient services sector, healthy balance sheets of
and April 2023, respectively. financial entities and corporates, and congenial
financial conditions are expected to boost aggregate
III.3 Conclusion
demand and growth. Structural reforms and GST
Economic activity remained resilient, mainly
rationalisation are likely to mitigate the adverse
supported by strong rural demand and robust
impact of trade uncertainty surrounding US tariffs.
government expenditure. Revival in manufacturing The headwinds emanating from prolonged geopolitical
and persistent strong performance of services sector tensions, persisting global uncertainties, and volatility
drove the recent momentum in aggregate output. in global financial markets continue to pose risks to the
Going ahead, sustained buoyancy in rural economy, growth outlook.
5555Monetary Policy Report October 2025
IV. Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Domestic financial markets remained resilient and relatively stable in contrast to volatile global markets during
H1:2025-26. The Reserve Bank ensured sufficient liquidity in the banking system. Money market rates moved
in tandem with the policy repo rate and shifts in liquidity conditions. Transmission to lending and deposit rates
remained robust. Market-based, non-bank sources of financing more than made up for the moderation in bank
credit growth in H1.
Introduction IV.1 Liquidity Conditions and the Operating
Procedure of Monetary Policy
During H1:2025-26, global financial markets turned
intermittently volatile amidst heightened trade-
The Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 requires the
related and geopolitical uncertainties. Advanced
Reserve Bank to place the operating procedure
economy central banks have adopted a cautious
relating to the implementation of monetary policy
data-dependent approach, given large uncertainties
and changes thereto from time to time, if any, in the
clouding the macroeconomic outlook. Global bond
public domain. The Reserve Bank’s extant Liquidity
yields, especially at the longer end, hardened in the
Management Framework, implemented in February
wake of elevated and rising public debt. Global equity
2020, has been operative for more than five years.1
markets gained in H1 amidst recurrent bouts of sell-
Since then, the financial landscape has undergone
offs. The US dollar traded with a weakening bias,
several structural changes, including the expanding
reflecting trade policy uncertainty, fiscal concerns,
footprint of digital payments, operationalisation of
and shifting expectations about the Fed’s policy path
(see Chapter V for details). a 24×365 payment systems and adoption of “Just-
in-Time” release of funds for centrally sponsored
In contrast to volatile global markets, domestic financial
schemes. These developments have profoundly
markets remained resilient and relatively stable
altered the liquidity management paradigm of the
during H1. The Monetary Policy Committee reduced
the policy rate cumulatively by 75 bps during H1. banking system, further compounded by volatile
Liquidity in the banking system remained in surplus, capital flows with their attendant implications for
mainly supported by durable liquidity injections system liquidity.
by the Reserve Bank and pick-up in government
A disconcerting development from a liquidity
spending. Money market rates remained largely
management perspective of the Reserve Bank has been
aligned to the policy rate, facilitating transmission to
the gradual shrinking of the share of uncollateralised
other markets (bond and credit markets). Monetary
call money market in total overnight money market
policy transmission was aided by a sizeable and faster
volume. In this regard, questions were raised on the
decline in lending and deposit rates in the current
appropriateness and efficacy of the weighted average
easing cycle. Bank credit growth, despite lower than
call rate (WACR) as the operating target of monetary
last year, continues to be healthy and supportive of
real economic activity. The financing from non-bank policy. Against this backdrop, the Reserve Bank
sources has increased, reflecting higher reliance on constituted an Internal Working Group whose major
market-based funding and offsetting the drag from recommendations suggested status quo in continuing
muted bank credit growth. with the existing framework (Box IV.1).
1 The revised liquidity management framework was announced on February 6, 2020, in the Statement on Developmental and Regulatory Policies, and
operationalised on February 14, 2020. The salient features of the framework were given in the Monetary Policy Report of April 2024.
56Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Box IV.1: Review of the Extant Liquidity Management
Framework – Major Recommendations
Operating Target • Transient liquidity shall be managed primarily
through 7-day repo/ reverse repo operations and
• The WACR should continue as the operating
other operations of tenors from overnight up to 14
target of monetary policy. WACR, being an
days at the discretion of the Reserve Bank, based on
uncollateralised rate, reflects credit/counterparty
its assessment of the system liquidity requirement.
risk that is not masked by collateral. Furthermore,
WACR exhibits a high degree of correlation with • The variable rate auction mechanism shall be
other money market rates. With the participants continued for conducting repo/reverse repo
in the call money market being entities under its operations as bids received in such auctions
regulatory purview, the Reserve Bank has better provide useful signal for assessing the true extent
control over the WACR. From this perspective,
of funds required from (or to be deployed with)
the collateralised market rates were not deemed
the central bank. Instruments under the extant
to be appropriate as the operating target as these
Liquidity Management Framework were deemed
segments are dominated by non-bank entities not
to be sufficient for meeting the durable liquidity
regulated by the Reserve Bank and, as such, do not
needs of the system and hence, the toolkit to
reflect the dynamics of the inter-bank market for
manage durable liquidity remains unchanged.
reserves.
Minimum Daily Reserve Requirement
Policy Corridor
• It was decided to continue with the daily minimum
• With regard to the appropriate corridor width, it
requirement of 90 per cent of the prescribed cash
was noted that while a wider corridor can encourage
reserve ratio (CRR). While acknowledging that
higher inter-bank activity, it also entails greater
reducing the minimum daily requirement may
volatility in overnight rates, thereby hindering the
provide greater headroom to banks to effectively
transmission to short-term rates. At the same time,
manage their liquidity over the maintenance period,
a narrow corridor, while providing the advantage of
it entailed risks of inducing greater volatility in the
better anchoring of short-term rates, may come at
WACR, especially towards the end of the reporting
the cost of reduced incentives for banks to transact
cycle. The case for no change was also due to the
among themselves. On balance, it was decided
observation that at the system level, banks rarely
to continue with the existing symmetric corridor
maintain daily reserve balances below 95 per cent
of 50 bps width, with the policy repo rate at the
of the prescribed CRR.
middle.
Standalone Primary Dealers’ (SPDs) Participation in
Liquidity Management Instruments
LAF Operations
• Banks faced challenges in forecasting their liquidity
• SPDs were already allowed to participate in all repo
position for a longer period resulting in their lower
participation in 14-day main operations. This operations irrespective of the tenor effective March
undermined the efficacy of main operations for 26, 2025. Therefore, SPDs need not be given access
liquidity management. Accordingly, 14-day Variable to the Marginal Standing Facility (MSF), as, unlike
Rate Repo/Variable Rate Reverse Repo (VRR/ banks, they have neither reserve requirements nor
VRRR) auctions were discontinued as the main unforeseen payment obligations beyond market
operation. hours.
5577Monetary Policy Report October 2025
During H1:2025-26, the Monetary Policy Committee auctions effective June 11, 2025 and started variable
reduced the policy repo rate by 75 basis points (bps) – rate reverse repo (VRRR) auctions from June 27,
a 25 bps cut in April followed by a 50 bps cut in June. 2025. On June 25, 2025, the Reserve Bank announced
With a cumulative rate cut of 100 bps since February extension in the market timings of both collateralised
2025, the Monetary Policy Committee in its June and uncollateralised segments of the money market
policy noted that monetary policy was left with very to facilitate market development, enhance price
discovery, and help banks optimise their liquidity
limited space to support growth under the prevailing
requirements. Furthermore, the aggregate limit
circumstances. Accordingly, it recalibrated the stance
available to Standalone Primary Dealers (SPDs)
of monetary policy to neutral from accommodative.
under the Standing Liquidity Facility was increased
The Reserve Bank also announced a reduction in
from ₹10,000 crore to ₹15,000 crore beginning April
the CRR by 100 bps to 3.0 per cent of net demand
2, 2025.
and time liabilities (NDTL) in a staggered manner
during September-November 2025. This reduction Drivers and Management of Liquidity
in four equal tranches of 25 bps each with effect
System liquidity, as measured by the net balances
from the fortnights beginning September 6, October
under the liquidity adjustment facility (LAF),
4, November 1, and November 29, 2025 will release
transitioned to surplus in H1:2025-26 from deficit
primary liquidity of about ₹2.5 lakh crore into the
in H2:2024-25 (Chart IV.1). The Reserve Bank’s
banking system by December 2025. Besides providing durable liquidity injections during Q4:2024-25 along
durable liquidity, the CRR cut would also reduce with increase in government spending drove this
the cost of funds for the banks, thereby facilitating transition.
transmission to the credit market.
On a net basis, average daily absorption amounted
In view of surplus liquidity conditions, the Reserve to ₹2.31 lakh crore in H1 (up to September 28, 2025)
Bank discontinued the daily variable rate repo (VRR) as against average daily injection of ₹0.36 lakh
Chart IV.1: Liquidity Operations
(₹ lakh crore)
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
0.5
-0.5
-1.5
-2.5
-3.5
-4.5
Daily standing deposit facility Variable rate reverse repo Net liquidity adjustment facility
Marginal standing facility Variable rate repo Total absorption
Source: RBI.
58
42-tcO-81 42-voN-20 42-voN-71 42-ceD-20 42-ceD-71 52-naJ-10 52-naJ-61 52-naJ-13 52-beF-51 52-raM-20 52-raM-71 52-rpA-10 52-rpA-61 52-yaM-10 52-yaM-61 52-yaM-13 52-nuJ-51 52-nuJ-03 52-luJ-51 52-luJ-03 52-guA-41 52-guA-92 52-peS-31 52-peS-82Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
crore in H2:2024-25. Changes in the Government of facility (SDF) balances remained elevated. Of the
India (GoI) cash balances, expansion in currency in average total absorption under the LAF at ₹2.52 lakh
circulation (CiC) and volatile capital flows emerged as crore during H1, average placement under the SDF
the major drivers of liquidity during H1. The leakage constituted about 72.6 per cent (₹1.84 lakh crore),
in the banking system liquidity due to the increase while the remaining surplus was absorbed through
in currency demand, buildup in GoI cash balances VRRR auctions. Banks’ holding of elevated SDF
and the Reserve Bank’s forex market operations was balances, inter alia, reflects their high precautionary
more than compensated by the reduction in CRR and demand for liquidity given the changing payments
the Reserve Bank’s durable liquidity augmenting system landscape. Moreover, lower credit demand
measures during H2:2024-25 and H1:2025-26. The resulted in a larger deployment of funds by banks
Reserve Bank’s Open Market Operations (OMOs) under the SDF.
purchases and term repo operations in Q1:2025-
To improve monetary transmission during the
26 more than offset the drag on liquidity from the
current easing cycle, the Reserve Bank complemented
seasonal expansion in currency in circulation (CiC).
frontloaded rate cuts with the infusion of sufficient
Liquidity conditions, however, moderated in Q2 on
liquidity in the banking system. Continuing its
account of buildup in GoI cash balances and RBI’s
liquidity injection measures of Q4:2024-25, the
forex operations (Table IV.1).
Reserve Bank injected durable liquidity amounting
With liquidity conditions remaining in surplus, to ₹2.65 lakh crore through nine OMO purchases
banks’ recourse to the MSF averaged at ₹0.02 lakh and one term VRR auction during April-May 2025
crore during H1:2025-26, while daily standing deposit (Table IV.2).
Table IV.1: Liquidity – Key Drivers and Management
(₹ crore)
2024-25 2025-26
H1 H2 Q1 Q2* H1*
Drivers
(i) CiC [withdrawal (-) /return (+)] 33,551 -2,37,928 -1,00,724 22,792 -77,932
(ii) Net Forex Purchases (+)/ Sales (-) 70,402 -3,61,635 3,892 -1,45,483 -1,41,591
(iii) GoI Cash Balances [build-up (-) / drawdown (+)] -1,50,494 1,85,231 -96,083 -1,34,720 -2,30,803
(iv) Excess Reserves [build-up (-) / drawdown (+)] 36,768 1,572 34,163 -4,704 29,459
Management
(i) Net OMO Purchases (+)/ Sales (-) -24,040 2,83,386 2,39,213 10 2,39,223
(ii) Required Reserves [including both change in NDTL and CRR] -55,613 76,450 -25,190 40,865 15,675
(iii) Term Repo Auctions - 1,82,964 25,731 - 25,731
Memo Item
(i) Long term Forex Swaps Buy/Sell (+)/ Sell/Buy (-) - 2,19,245^ - - -
(ii) Net Absorption (+)/ Injection (-) as at end-period 84,651 -172 3,07,793 56,274 56,274
Note: 1. (+) / (-) sign suggests accretion/depletion in banking system liquidity.
2. Data pertains to the last Friday of the respective period.
3. *: Data for Q2 and H1:2025-26 are up to September 26, 2025.
4. ^: approximate values.
Source: RBI.
5599Monetary Policy Report October 2025
rates hovered near the floor of the LAF corridor
Table IV.2: Reserve Bank’s Liquidity Measures
amidst large surplus liquidity, the Reserve Bank
since January 2025
resumed VRRR auction on June 27, 2025, after a gap
Period Liquidity Measures Amount Injected
(in ₹ crore) of nearly eight months. Since then, the Reserve Bank
Q4:2024-25 a. OMO purchases (6) 2,44,561 has conducted 23 VRRR auctions of maturity ranging
b. Term VRRs (3) 1,82,964
c. Forex Swaps (3) 2,19,245* from overnight to 8-days. In general, the auctions
April 2025 a. OMO purchases (5) 1,20,000 elicited better response from banks, with an average
b. Term VRR (1) 25,731
offer-cover ratio of 0.83, compared to the response
May 2025 a. OMO purchases (4) 1,19,203
received in VRR auctions (Chart IV.2b). When the
Total 9,11,704*
banking system faced transient liquidity tightness
Note: Figures in parentheses denote number of auctions.
*: Indicates aproximate value. due to tax related outflows on select days, thirteen
Source: RBI.
VRR auctions of overnight to 6-day maturity were
also conducted in Q2:2025-26. The Reserve Bank
The Reserve Bank remained nimble and agile in
maintained sufficient liquidity in the banking system
its liquidity management operations and ensured
during H1 to meet the productive requirements of
sufficient liquidity in the banking system to support
the economy.
transmission to money and credit markets. With
liquidity conditions improving during H1:2025- As on September 26, 2025, reserve money expanded
26, the demand for transitory liquidity moderated by 4.5 per cent (y-o-y) as against 6.0 per cent a year
since April 2025, as reflected in the low bid-cover ago. Adjusted for the CRR change, growth in reserve
ratios in the daily VRR auctions (Chart IV.2a). Tepid money stood at 8.4 per cent (7.4 per cent a year
response amidst sufficient surplus liquidity ago). The higher growth in reserve money reflected
prompted the Reserve Bank to discontinue the daily the expansion in currency in circulation. As on
VRR auctions effective June 11, 2025. As overnight September 19, 2025, growth in money supply (M3)
Chart IV.2: Offer/Bid-cover Ratio and Banks’ Preference for Liquidity
a. Liquidity Conditions and Bid-cover b. Bid/Offer-Co ver Ratio of Variable
Ratio of Daily VRRs Rate Operations
(Ratio, left scale; Per cent, right scale) (Ratio)
1.2
2.0 2.0
0.96
1.8
1.6 1.5 1.0 (10)
1.4 1.0 0.76 0.73
1.2 0.5 0.8 0.63 (9) (1)
1.0
0.0 (3)
0.8
0.6
0.6 -0.5 0.36 0.53
00 .. 24 -1.0 0.4 0.32 (11) (5)
0.0 -1.5 (27)
0.2
0.01
0 (1) 0
0.0
Overnight 2-3 4-6 7-8 14
Tenor
Net LAF to NDTL (RHS) Bid Cover ratio Variable rate repo Variable rate reverse repo
Note: Figures in parentheses indicate number of operations.
Source: RBI.
60
5202
,61
naJ
5202
,22
naJ
5202
,72
naJ
5202
,13
naJ
5202
,6
beF
5202
,21
beF
5202
,81
beF
5202
,42
beF
5202
,30
raM
5202
,70
raM
5202
,31
raM
5202
,81
raM
5202
,12
raM
5202
,62
raM
5202
,20
rpA
5202
,80
rpA
5202
,61
rpA
5202
,32
rpA
5202
,92
rpA
5202
,60
yaM
5202
,31
yaM
5202
,91
yaM
5202
,32
yaM
5202
,92
yaM
5202
,40
nuJ
5202
,01
nuJ
5202
,61
peS
5202
,22
peS
5202
,52
peSChapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
decelerated to 9.2 per cent (y-o-y) from 10.4 per to a lesser extent than short-term yields, in response
cent a year ago primarily reflecting a deceleration to domestic developments and global cues. Equity
in aggregate deposit growth. The money multiplier markets remained buoyant, despite bouts of volatility
increased to 5.8 as on September 19, 2025, from 5.6 a amidst tariff related uncertainty. The Indian rupee
year ago, reflecting the impact of the CRR cut. traded with a depreciating bias against the US dollar
in H1 but remained amongst the least volatile major
IV.2 Domestic Financial Markets
EM currencies. Overall, monetary policy, along
Domestic financial markets remained resilient and with liquidity easing measures, has contributed to
relatively stable. Money market rates evolved in favourable financial conditions by influencing both
sync with the policy rate trajectory and transition money and bond markets (Box IV.2). In the credit
in system liquidity. Long-term government bond market, growth in bank credit has witnessed an
yields eased during the current easing cycle, albeit uptick in the recent months.
Box IV.2: Impact of Monetary Policy Surprises on Financial Conditions
Monetary policy primarily influences short-term long-difference specification with lagged controls
interest rates in an economy through changes in the (Jordà and Taylor, 2025)3:
policy rate. Its impact on the real economy, however,
y α βhmps γh y ε; for h (1)
is routed through the changes in overall financial t h t t
conditions across market segments. Therefore, the w Δh+er =e y + y – + y Δis t-1h +e cut mulat ∈iv e {0 c ,h 1a ,2n ,…ge , Nin } FCI
t h t h t-
effectiveness of monetary policy can be gauged from over a window of h days, mps is the policy shock at
Δ + = + 1 t
its effect on financial conditions. Accordingly, to time t and βh traces the cumulative change in FCI over
examine the impact of monetary policy shocks on a window of h days following the policy shock.
overall financial conditions in the Indian context, Related literature also suggests asymmetric impact
a high-frequency financial conditions index (FCI), of monetary policy on financial market indicators.
based on select indicators from money, government Financial frictions, credit constraints, and time-varying
securities (G-sec), corporate bond, equity, and forex risk premia are some of the potential drivers of this
markets is used (Bandyopadhyay et al., 2025). In the asymmetric impact. To test the differential impact of
extant literature, it is common to use high-frequency monetary policy tightening vis-à-vis easing on financial
interest rate changes around central bank policy conditions, equation (1) is modified as follows (Adrian
announcements for identifying monetary policy et al., 2024):
shocks. Following this approach, policy shocks are
y α ρhmps mps- δhmps mps γh y ε (2)
estimated as the first principal component of policy- t h t t t
day changes in the Overnight Indexed Swap (OIS) rates w Δh+er =e m p +s a nd mt.ps- a +re in dicatt .or va+ r +ia bl e Δs t-o1 +c aptture
t t
of various maturities (Barakchian and Crowe, 2013; policy tigh+tening and easing, respectively. mps and
t
Nakamura and Steinsson, 2018).2 Further, to examine mps- take the value of 1 when mps is positive+ and
t
the response of FCI to monetary policy shocks, a local negative, respectively, and 0 otherwise. So, while δh
t
projections framework is employed for the sample traces the response for policy tightening, ρh traces the
period January 2014 to August 2025 with the following response for policy easing.
2 OIS rates of 1, 3, 6, 9-month and 1-year maturities are used.
3 Jorda and Taylor (2025) show that local projections using the long difference specification considerably alleviates the problem of bias and autocorrelation
in small samples.
6611Monetary Policy Report October 2025
The results indicate that a policy surprise equivalent à-vis easing as a positive shock is found to have a larger
to a 100 basis points increase in the 1-year OIS rate is tightening impact on FCI than the easing impact of a
associated with a 0.13 standard deviation tightening negative shock (Chart IV.2.1 b). This finding highlights
in FCI over the week following the policy shock (Chart the need for judicious use of forward guidance and
IV.2.1 a). Moreover, the findings also reaffirm the liquidity measures along with rate actions to reinforce
asymmetric impact of monetary policy tightening vis- the effect of policy easing.
Chart IV.2.1: Response to a Monetary Policy Surprise
a. Unconditional Response b. Response to Tightening versus Easing
(Standard Deviations of FCI) (Standard Deviations of FCI)
Notes: The left chart plots the estimates of βh from (1) while the right chart plots the estimates of -ρh (to signify easing surprise) and δh (tightening surprise) from (2);
Shaded areas represent the 90 per cent confidence bands constructed using Newey-West adjusted standard errors.
Source: RBI Staff estimates.
References: Barakchian, S. M., & Crowe, C. (2013). Monetary policy
matters: Evidence from new shocks data. Journal of
Adrian, T., Gelos, G., Lamersdorf, N., & Moench, E.
Monetary Economics, 60(8), 950-966.
(2024). The asymmetric and persistent effects of Fed
policy on global bond yields. Bank for International Jordà, Ò., & Taylor, A. M. (2025). Local projections.
Settlements, Working paper-1195. Journal of Economic Literature, 63(1), 59-110.
Bandyopadhyay, P., Kumar, A., Kumar, P. and Nakamura, E. and Steinsson, J. (2018). High-Frequency
Bhattacharyya, I. (2025), Financial Conditions Index Identification of Monetary Non-Neutrality: The
for India: A High-frequency Approach. Reserve Bank Information Effect. The Quarterly Journal of Economics,
of India Bulletin, June. https://rbi.org.in/Scripts/BS_ Volume 133, Issue 3, August 2018, pp.1283–1330,
ViewBulletin.aspx?Id=23451 https://doi.org/10.1093/qje/qjy004
IV.2.1 Money Market near its floor during April to early July reflecting large
surplus liquidity in the banking system. With VRRR
During H1:2025-26, money market rates largely moved
auctions absorbing surplus liquidity since end-June,
in line with the policy repo rate and the evolving
liquidity conditions. The weighted average call rate the WACR increased and traded closer to the policy
(WACR) – the operating target of monetary policy rate since mid-July 2025.4 Generally, movements in
– remained within the policy corridor and hovered the WACR reflected transient liquidity conditions,
4 The WACR moved close to the ceiling of the LAF corridor (MSF Rate) on July 23, 2025, mainly due to Goods and Services Tax outflows, causing liquidity
strain.
62Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Chart IV.4: Money Market Rates and
Policy Corridor
(Per cent)
8.50
8.25
8.00
7.75
7.50
7.25
7.00
6.75
6.50
6.25
6.00
5.75
5.50
5.25
5.00
4.75
WACR Triparty repo rate Market repo rate
3-month CP rate 3-month CD rate 91-day T-bill rate
SDF rate Repo rate MSF rate
Sources: Financial Benchmarks India Pvt Ltd.; and RBI.
6633
42-voN-62 42-ceD-51 52-naJ-30 52-naJ-22 52-beF-01 52-raM-10 52-raM-02 52-rpA-80 52-rpA-72 52-yaM-61 52-nuJ-40 52-nuJ-32 52-luJ-21 52-luJ-13 52-guA-91 52-peS-70 52-peS-62
softening at the beginning of the month on higher
government spending and hardening during the latter
half due to tax outflows. The WACR showed better
alignment with the policy repo rate in Q2:2025-26,
with its spread over the policy repo rate narrowing
to (-)8 bps compared to (-)17 bps in Q1 (Chart IV.3a).
Volatility in the WACR, as measured by the exponential
weighted moving average (EWMA)5, declined since
April 2025 after remaining elevated in H2:2024-25
(Chart IV.3.b). Overnight rates in the collateralised
segment, i.e., triparty repo and market repo, broadly
moved in tandem with the WACR during H1:2025-26
(Chart IV.4.)
Money market activity was dominated by the
collateralised segments (tri-party and market repo),
although their share in overnight money market
Mutual funds remained major lenders in tri-party
volume declined slightly to 97 per cent. Concomitantly,
repo, with their share increasing by 2 percentage
the uncollateralised segment, i.e., the call money
market witnessed a modest increase in its share points to 68 per cent in H1:2025-26 from H2:2024-
to above 3 per cent in September 2025. This could 25. However, in the market repo segment, the share
be partly attributed to the extension of call money of mutual funds’ lending reduced to 40 per cent in
market timings effective July 1, 2025 (Table IV.3). H1:2025-26 from 46 per cent in H2:2024-25. The share
Chart IV.3: Policy Corridor and WACR
a. Liquidity, Policy Corridor and b. Average Spread of WACR over
Weighted Average Call Rate Repo Rate and Volatility
(Per cent, left scale; ₹ Lakh Crore, right scale) (Basis points, left scale; Volatility [exponential weighted
7.50 4.5 moving average], right scale)
7.25 4.0 7.00 33 .. 05
6.75 2.5
6.50 2.0 6.25 1.5
6.00 01 .. 50
5.75 0.0
5.50 -0.5
5.25 -1.0
5.00 -- 21 .. 05
4.75 -2.5
4.50 -3.0
Net liquidity surplus (+)/deficit (-) (RHS) Weighted average call rate
Standing deposit facility rate Repo rate Spread (In absolute terms)
Marginal standing facility rate Exponential weighted moving average (RHS)
Sources: RBI; and RBI staff calculations.
42-tcO-91 42-voN-70 42-voN-62 42-ceD-51 52-naJ-30 52-naJ-22 52-beF-01 52-raM-10 52-raM-02 52-rpA-80 52-rpA-72 52-yaM-61 52-nuJ-40 52-nuJ-32 52-luJ-21 52-luJ-13 52-guA-91 52-peS-70 52-peS-62
20 20 0.10
18
15 0.08 15
13
12
11 0.06
10
7 6 6 0.04
5
5
0.02
2
1
0 0.00
42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA 52-peS
5 EWMA is an improvement over simple variance as it assigns greater weight to more recent observations. EWMA expresses volatility as a weighted
average of past volatility with higher weights assigned to more recent observations.Monetary Policy Report October 2025
(CP) and certificates of deposit (CDs) declined by
around 150 bps from end-March 2025 to end-August
2025, larger than the policy rate reduction of 100 bps
since February. The average spread of CDs and CPs
over the policy repo rate also narrowed substantially
to 36 bps and 59 bps, respectively, in H1:2025-26 from
91 bps and 105 bps, respectively, in H2:2024-25. The
average spread of treasury bills (T-Bills) over the policy
repo rate turned negative, amidst ample liquidity in
the banking system (Chart IV.4).
Fresh issuances of CDs declined to ₹4.8 lakh crore
of foreign banks’ lending in market repo also declined
in H1:2025-26 from ₹6.6 lakh crore in H2:2024-25,
reflecting the narrowing of the wedge in deposit and
to 29 per cent from 31 per cent during the same period.
On the borrowing side, public sector banks (PSBs) credit growth. Tenor-wise, CD issuances in the shorter
remained the major players in tri-party repo, although tenor (up to 91-day) increased on account of declining
their share reduced to 28 per cent in H1:2025-26 from interest rate. There was a concomitant decline in
40 per cent in H2:2024-25. During the same period, longer tenor issuances (Table IV.4). The issuances of
the share of private sector banks increased to 28 per CPs in the primary market increased to ₹8.8 lakh crore
cent from 22 per cent. PSBs had a relatively smaller during H1:2025-26 from ₹8.2 lakh crore in H2:2024-25
presence in market repo, with their share remaining (Chart IV.5a). The money market risk premia (spread
steady at 6 per cent over the same period. of 3-month CP rate over 91-day T-bills rate) declined
in July but increased subsequently in August, broadly
The term segments of the money market witnessed
faster monetary policy transmission aided by surplus tracking the movement in the policy uncertainty
liquidity conditions. The rates on commercial paper index (Chart IV.5.b).
Chart IV.5: Primary Issuances of Commercial Paper
a. System Liquidity, Issuances and WADR b. Commercial Paper Spread and Policy Uncertainity
(₹ Lakh Crore, left scale; Per cent , right scale) (Percentage points, left scale; Index, right scale)
4 7.8
7.6
3
7.4 2 1.6 13 .051.421.271.151.151.50 1.091.461.85 1.63 1.301.601.53 1.181.607.2
7.0 1
6.8
0 6.6
-1 6.4
6.2
-2 6.0
-3 6.25 5.8
Average daily liquidity surplus (+)/deficit(-)
Issuance Spread of 3 Month Commercial Paper over 91-Day Treasury-bill
Weighted average discount rate India Policy Uncertainty Index
Note: Net liquidity adjustment facility represents absorption (through SDF and VRRR) net of injection (through MSF and VRR).
Sources: RBI; Clearing Corporation of India Limited F-TRAC; www.policyuncertainty.com; and RBI staff estimates.
64
42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA 52-peS
1.3 180
1.2
160 1.1
1.0 123.22 140
0.9
120
0.8
0.7 100
0.6
0.73 80
0.5
0.4 60
42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA 52-peS
Table IV.3: Average Volume and Share in Overnight
Money Market
(₹ Lakh Crore)
2024-25 2025-26
H1 H2 Q1 Q2* H1*
Call/Notice 0.10(2.1) 0.11(2.2) 0.15(2.7) 0.16(2.9) 0.16(2.8)
Triparty Repo 3.30(68) 3.62(70) 3.70(66) 3.67(66) 3.68(66)
Market Repo 1.48(30) 1.42(28) 1.74(31) 1.71(31) 1.73(31)
Total 4.88(100) 5.16(100) 5.59(100) 5.54(100) 5.57(100)
Notes: 1. Figures in parentheses denote share of each segment in
overnight money market. Figure may not add up to total due to
rounding off.
2. *: Up to September 26, 2025.
Sources: Clearing Corporation of India Ltd.; and RBI.Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Table IV.4: Tenor wise Break up for CD Issuances Chart IV.6: Issuer Profile of Commercial Paper
(₹ Lakh Crore) (₹ Lakh Crore)
2.0
2024-25 2025-26
1.8
H1 H2 Q1 Q2* H1*
1.6
Up to 91 Days 3.93(73) 3.74(57) 1.95(83) 1.55(64) 3.50(74) 1.4
92-180 Days 0.20(4) 0.17(3) 0.11(5) 0.34(14) 0.45(9) 1.2
1.0
181-365 Days 1.22(23) 2.64(40) 0.28(12) 0.53(22) 0.81(17)
0.8
Total 5.35(100) 6.56(100) 2.34(100) 2.42(100) 4.76(100) 0.6
Notes: 1. Figures in parentheses denote share of each maturity profile. 0.4
2. Figure may not add up to total due to rounding off.
0.2
3. *: Up to September 26, 2025.
Sources: Clearing Corporation of India Limited; and RBI staff estimates. 0.0
With favourable interest rates incentivising market-
Financial institutions Corporates
based financing, corporates dominated the CP Housing finance companies NBFCs
Limited Liability Partnership
primary market, with an average share of 48 per cent
Sources: RBI; Clearing Corporation of India Limited F-TRAC; and RBI staff estimates.
for H1:2025-26. The average share of non-banking
financial companies (NBFCs), however, reduced to 29
IV.2.2 Government Securities (G-sec) Market
per cent in H1:2025-26 from 33 per cent in H2:2024-
The Government Securities (G-sec) market remained
25. It could be partly attributed to the reversal of risk
broadly resilient, albeit volatile during H1:2025-26
weights on bank lending to NBFCs effective from
amidst favourable domestic outlook but a challenging
April 1, 2025, improving the overall credit availability
global environment. The 10-year G-sec yield moved
to NBFCs (Chart IV.6). In terms of maturity profile,
in the range of 6.19 - 6.77 per cent during H1:2025-
the 91-180 days segment had the largest share (51
26 (up to September 26, 2025). At the beginning of
per cent) in fresh CP issuances, followed by the 31-90
H1, yields softened reflecting the reduction in the
days segment (Table IV.5).
policy repo rate, change in the policy stance from
neutral to accommodative, open market operation
Table IV.5: Maturity Profile of CP Issuances
(OMO) purchases by the Reserve Bank, and softening
(₹ Lakh Crore)
Tenor H2: 2023-24 H1: 2024-25 H2: 2024-25 H1: 2025- crude oil prices. Yields declined further in May and
26*
early June, driven by lower-than-expected April CPI
7- 30 days 0.48(7) 0.63(8) 0.51(6) 0.42(5)
inflation print, market expectations of a rate cut in
31-90 days 2.32(35) 2.35(31) 2.33(28) 3.06(35)
June, continued OMO purchases by the Reserve Bank
91-180 days 3.11(47) 3.94(52) 4.24(52) 4.54(51)
and record surplus transfer from the Reserve Bank to
181-365 days 0.77(12) 0.64(8) 1.11(14) 0.82(9)
the Government of India.
Total 6.67(100) 7.55(100) 8.19(100) 8.84(100)
G-sec yields firmed up post the June policy
Outstanding 3.89 3.98 4.43 4.89
(as at end- announcement, as the change in stance from
period)
‘accommodative’ to ‘neutral’ diminished market
Notes: 1. Figures in parentheses denote share of each maturity profile.
Figure may not add up to total due to rounding off. expectations of a deeper rate cut cycle. After
2. *: Up to September 26, 2025.
Sources: Clearing Corporation of India Limited F-TRAC; and RBI. remaining broadly stable in the first half of July,
6655
32-nuJ 32-peS 32-ceD 42-raM 42-nuJ 42-peS 42-ceD 52-raM 52-nuJ 52-peSMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart IV.7: 10-year Par Yield, Repo Rate and Liquidity Conditions
(Per cent, left scale; ₹ lakh crore, right scale)
8.00 5.0
4.5
7.75
Fiscal concerns due to GST
4.0
7.50 rationalisation Higher GDP growth
3.5
7.25 Retention of credit ratings
7.00 Lower CPI Print Rise in CPI print 3.0
Change in policy stance 2.5
6 66. ..7 255
50
Lo w e r C PI P r in t R isi n g g eo - p o l iti c a l ten s i o n
lo w er U S lab o u r m a r k et da t a
112 ... 050
6.00 Rise in US yields 0.5
Reduced GDP numbers tracking declin e in US
5.75 expectation of rate cut and buyback yields/crude oil price 0.0
5.50 announcements -0.5
5.25 -1.0
Total liquidity (RHS) 10-year par yield Repo rate
Sources: RBI; and Financial Benchmarks India Pvt. Ltd.
G-sec yields began to harden in the second half tenor and hardened at the longer end in September
amidst uncertainty surrounding the US trade (Chart IV.8).
deals and rise in crude oil prices. In August, yields
The average trading volume in G-secs and T-bills
continued to harden, tracking movements in US
increased in H1:2025-26 relative to H2:2024-25 (Chart
yields and heightened trade uncertainties from
IV.9). The weighted average yield (WAY) on traded
the imposition of additional tariffs on India.
maturities for G-secs and T-bills declined by 38 bps and
Yields softened briefly on S&P’s upgrade of India’s
89 bps, respectively, in H1 as compared to H2:2024-25.
sovereign ratings on August 14, 2025 but rose again
on fiscal concerns stemming from lower growth in
direct tax collections and rationalisation of GST rates
(Chart IV.7). Beginning September, yields have eased
on receding fiscal concerns, softening US yields and
declining crude oil prices.
The yields on T-bills softened during April and May
amidst the policy repo rate cut and large surplus
liquidity. The higher-than-expected repo rate cut
and persistent surplus liquidity led to further
moderation in yields in June. Yields hardened in
August amidst the uncertainty on the interest rate
trajectory with the MPC maintaining status quo on
both rate and stance, and liquidity absorption by
the Reserve Bank that raised short-term rates. T-bill
rates softened at the short end till the three-month
66
52-rpA-20 52-rpA-70 52-rpA-21 52-rpA-71 52-rpA-22 52-rpA-72 52-yaM-20 52-yaM-70 52-yaM-21 52-yaM-71 52-yaM-22 52-yaM-72 52-nuJ-10 52-nuJ-60 52-nuJ-11 52-nuJ-61 52-nuJ-12 52-nuJ-62 52-luJ-10 52-luJ-60 52-luJ-11 52-luJ-61 52-luJ-12 52-luJ-62 52-luJ-13 52-guA-50 52-guA-01 52-guA-51 52-guA-02 52-guA-52 52-guA-03 52-peS-40 52-peS-90 52-peS-41 52-peS-91 52-peS-42
Chart IV.8: FBIL T-Bill Benchmark
Yield to Maturity (Per cent)
6.35
6.20
6.05 6.06
5.90
5.75
5.61
5.60
5.57
5.45
5.40
5.30
5.15
5.00
Tenor
April 09, 2025 August 06, 2025
June 06, 2025 September 26, 2025
Source: Financial Benchmarks India Pvt. Ltd.
syaD
7
syaD
41
htnoM
1
shtnoM
2
shtnoM
3
shtnoM
4
shtnoM
5
shtnoM
6
shtnoM
7
shtnoM
8
shtnoM
9
shtnoM
01
shtnoM
11
shtnoM
21Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Chart IV.9: Trading Volumes and Yield
a. G-Sec b. T-Bills
(₹ crore, left scale; Per cent, right scale) (₹ crore, left scale; Per cent, right scale)
80,000 7.22 7.5 8,000 7521 7.5
70,000 6.99 66971 7.0 6799 6445
6.78
6.96 6.77 5968
60,000 57427 53731 6.40 6.5 6,000 6.51 6.5
50,000 6.0
41041
40,000 5.5 4,000 5.62 5.5
30,000 5.0
20,000 4.5 2,000 4.5
10,000 4.0
0 3.5 0 3.5
H2:2023-24 H1:2024-25 H2:2024-25 H1:2025-26 H2:2023-24 H1:2024-25 H2:2024-25 H1:2025-26
Average daily volume Average daily volume
Weighted average yield of traded maturities Weighted average yield of traded maturities
Sources: Clearing Corporation of India Limited; and RBI staff estimates.
The overall dynamics of the yield curve are captured 26 widened the term spread (Chart IV.10a), which is
by its latent factors, viz., level, slope and curvature6. partly attributed to (i) demand-supply mismatches in
Yields have declined at the short end, while they have the G-sec market; and (ii) shift in investment pattern
hardened at the long end of the term structure. This of insurance companies, pension and provident funds
bear steepening of the yield curve during H1:2025- from government bonds to equities and corporate
Chart IV.10: G-Sec Yield Curve
a. Shifts b. Changes in Level, Slope and Curvature
(Per cent) (Basis points)
7.40
7.29
7.20
7.10
6.98
6.80
6.50
6.20
5.90
5.60
5.30
Mar 28 - Apr 08- June 05- Aug 05 - Cumulative
Maturity in years Apr 08 June 05 Aug 05 Sept 26 (Mar 28 -
Sept 26)
Mar 28, 2025 April 09, 2025 June 06, 2025
August 06, 2025 September 26, 2025 Level Slope Curvature
Sources: Financial Benchmarks India Pvt. Ltd; Clearing Corporation of India Limited; and RBI staff estimates.
6 The level is the average of par yields of all tenors up to 30-years published by FBIL and the slope (term spread) is the difference in par yields of
3-months and 30-year maturities. The curvature is calculated as twice the 15-year yield minus the sum of 30-year and 3-month yields.
6677
52.0 57.1 52.3 57.4 52.6 57.7 52.9 57.01 52.21 57.31 52.51 57.61 52.81 57.91 52.12 57.22 52.42 57.52 52.72 57.82 52.03 57.13 52.33 57.43 52.63 57.73 52.93 57.04 52.24 57.34 52.54 57.64 52.84 57.94
116
115
100 92
85
70
55 42 4442
40
28
24
25 16 18 17
10 6 6 2
-5
-9 -20
-24
-35Monetary Policy Report October 2025
bonds. The average level of yields increased by Government of India amounting to ₹1,29,697 crore
2 bps, while the slope of the yield curve steepened during H1:2025-26. Even as the weighted average
by 116 bps (Chart IV.10b). The curvature, on the maturity of the outstanding stock of G-secs increased
other hand, also increased by 92 bps, reflecting the from 13.24 years at end-March 2025 to 13.58 years as
hardening bias in the mid-segment. In the Indian on September 26, 2025, the weighted average coupon
context, the level and curvature of the yield curve are declined from 7.25 per cent to 7.21 per cent over
the same period. During H1:2025-26, four buyback
found to have more information content on future
auctions were announced for an aggregate amount
macroeconomic outcomes than the slope owing to
of ₹1.06 lakh crore with a view to retiring some of
market segmentation, unlike in AEs (Patra et al, 2022)7.
the Government of India’s debt, in the backdrop of
Cross-country evidence broadly suggests that G-sec
improved cash position. The market response to the
yields have not declined proportionately to the
auctions was modest with the Reserve Bank accepting
changes in policy rate by central banks during the
offers aggregating to only ₹0.87 lakh crore against the
current easing cycle, although there are variations
notified amount of ₹1.06 lakh crore.
across countries. These variations reflect varying
The weighted average spread of cut-off yields on state
initial conditions, heterogeneous impact of trade
government securities over G-sec yields of comparable
and geopolitical uncertainties on macroeconomic
maturities was 38 bps in H1:2025-26 (up to September
conditions and the outlook, inflation expectations
26) (Chart IV.12) as against 30 bps in H2:2024-25. The
and investor sentiment across countries (Chart IV.11).
average inter-state spread on securities of 10-year
As part of active debt consolidation, the Reserve Bank tenor (fresh issuances) was 5 bps in H1:2025-26 (up to
conducted seven switch auctions on behalf of the September 26) as against 4 bps in H2:2024-25.
Chart IV.11: Changes in Policy Rate and
10-year Yields
(Basis points)
50 39
16
20
-10 -0.3
-- 74 00 -41 -35 -56 -46 -24
-100 -75 -75-82 -100 -100
-130 -125
-160
-190 -166
-220
-250 -250 -280
-310
-340
-370
-400 -400
-430
Change in policy rate Change in yield
7 Patra, M.D., Joice, J., Kushwaha, K.M., and I. Bhattacharyya (2022), “What is the Yield Curve telling us about the Economy?”, Reserve Bank of India
Bulletin, June.
68
SU aerA
oruE
KU aisyalaM ocixeM dnaliahT aisenodnI aissuR aidnI
35,000 67
62
30,000
57 25,000 52
47
20,000 42
37
15,000
32
27 10,000
22
5,000 17
12
0 7
rpA-30 rpA-80 rpA-51 rpA-22 rpA-92 yaM-60 yaM-31 yaM-02 yaM-72 nuJ-30 nuJ-01 nuJ-71 nuJ-42 luJ-10 luJ-80 luJ-51 luJ-22 luJ-92 guA-50 guA-21 guA-91 guA-62 peS-20 peS-90 peS-61 peS-32
Chart IV.12: State Government Securities -
Amount Raised and Spread
(₹ crore, left scale; Basis points, right scale)
Total accepted amount
Cumulative weighted average spread (RHS)
Source: Bloomberg; CEIC; and RBI Staff estimates. Source: Financial Benchmarks India Pvt. Ltd.Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
IV.2.3 Corporate Bond Market 26 and uncertainty about the growth outlook (Table
IV.6). The average 3-year credit default swap spreads
Corporate bond yields declined tracking softening of
(trading overseas for the State Bank of India and ICICI
G-sec yields while spreads exhibited a mixed trend
Bank) increased by 5 bps and 3 bps, respectively, in
during H1:2025-26 (up to September 25). Issuer-wise,
H1:2025-26 (up to September 26) over H2:2024-25.
the average yield on AAA-rated 3-year bonds of public
sector undertakings (PSUs), financial institutions Primary issuances of listed corporate bonds in
(FIs) and banks softened by 62 bps (to 6.86 per cent), domestic markets increased to ₹4.0 lakh crore
while those of non-banking financial companies
during H1:2025-26 (up to August 2025) from ₹3.3
lakh crore during the corresponding period of the
(NBFCs) and corporates declined by 56 bps (to 7.15
previous year due to favourable cost conditions
per cent) and 50 bps (to 7.12 per cent), respectively,
engendered by monetary policy easing (Chart IV.14a).
in September 2025 (up to September 25) over March
Overseas issuances declined significantly to ₹3,243
2025 (Chart IV.13a). The average bond market risk
crore during H1:2025-26 (up to August 2025) from
premium (i.e., the spread of 3-year AAA corporate
₹23,014 crore during the same period last year
bond yields over 3-year G-sec yields) reduced from
amidst conducive environment for raising resources
83 bps to 79 bps for PSUs, FIs and banks; while it
in domestic markets. Almost the entire resource
increased from 106 bps to 108 bps for NBFCs; and
mobilisation in the corporate bond market (i.e., 98.9
from 98 bps to 105 bps for corporates in H1:2025-
per cent) was through the private placement route
26 (in September 2025 over March 2025), amidst
in H1 (up to August 2025). Outstanding investments
mixed corporate earnings results for Q1:2025-26
by foreign portfolio investors (FPIs) in corporate
(Chart IV.13b).
bonds stood at ₹1.29 lakh crore as on September
The risk premia generally moderated for higher 26, 2025 as against ₹1.21 lakh crore at end-March
rated bonds, while it widened for lower rated bonds 2025, with the utilisation of investment limits
amidst mixed corporate performance in Q1:2025- declining marginally to 15.7 per cent from 15.8 per
Chart IV.13: AAA-rated 3-Year Corporate Bond Yield and Spreads
a. Yield b. Spread
(Per cent) (Basis points)
8.5
8.0 7.20
7.5 7.12
7.0
6.5 6.86
6.0
5.98
5.5
5.0
NBFCs Corporates
PSUs, FIs & Banks 3-Yr G-sec NBFCs PSUs, FIs & Banks Corporates
Note: Chart 1b plots monthly average spreads over G-secs. Data is up to September 25, 2025.
Source: Fixed Income Money Market and Derivatives Association of India.
6699
42-rpA-10 42-rpA-12 42-yaM-11 42-yaM-13 42-nuJ-02 42-luJ-01 42-luJ-03 42-guA-91 42-peS-80 42-peS-82 42-tcO-81 42-voN-70 42-voN-72 42-ceD-71 52-naJ-60 52-naJ-62 52-beF-51 52-raM-70 52-raM-72 52-rpA-61 52-yaM-60 52-yaM-62 52-nuJ-51 52-luJ-50 52-luJ-52 52-guA-41 52-peS-30 52-peS-32
130
120
110 108
100 105
90
80
70 79
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA 52-peSMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Table IV.6: Financial Markets - Rates and Spread
Interest Rates Spread (bps)
(Per cent) (over corresponding risk-free rate)
Instrument September 2024 March 2025 September 2025 September 2024 March 2025 September 2025
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Corporate Bonds
(i) AAA (1-yr) 7.92 7.76 6.67 117 115 98
(ii) AAA (3-yr) 7.80 7.62 7.12 97 98 105
(iii) AAA (5-yr) 7.70 7.60 7.21 86 89 86
(iv) AA (3-yr) 8.55 8.43 8.21 172 178 215
(v) BBB-minus (3-yr) 12.14 12.09 11.89 531 544 583
Note: Yields and spreads are computed as monthly averages. Data is up to September 25, 2025.
Source: Fixed Income Money Market and Derivatives Association of India.
cent (Chart IV.14b). Secondary market activity picked IV.2.4 Equity Market
up, with trading volume at ₹10.1 lakh crore during During H1:2025-26 so far (up to September 26),
H1:2025-26 (up to August 2025) vis-à-vis ₹6.3 lakh Indian equity markets remained on an upward
crore during the corresponding period last year trajectory, despite bouts of volatility amidst trade
(Chart IV.14c). policy uncertainty and geopolitical tensions. After
Chart IV.14: Corporate Bond Market Activity
a. Domestic and Overseas Issuances b. FPI Investments in Corporate Bonds
(₹ lakh crore) (₹ lakh crore, left scale, Per cent, right scale)
6 5.3
5 4.9 4.6 4.6 3.9 4.0
4
3
2
1 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.0
0
Domestic Overseas Total investment % of limit utilised
c. Secondary Market Turnover
(₹ lakh crore)
*: Data is up to August 2025.
Sources: Securities and Exchange Board of India; National Securities Depository Limited; and Prime Database.
70
32-2202
:2H
42-3202:1H 42-3202
:2H
52-4202
:1H
52-4202:2H *62-5202
:1H
1.4 1.29 18.0
1.2 1.03 1.08 1.18 1.21 17.5
1.0 17.0
0.8
16.5
0.6
16.0
0.4
0.2 15.5
0.0 15.0
32-peS-92 42-raM-82 42-peS-03 52-raM-82 52-peS-62
2.5 2.3 2.3 2.2
2.1 2.1
2.0 1.9
1.7
1.5 1.5 1.6
1.5 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.4
1.2 1.1
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.0
42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guAChapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
an initial decline, markets recovered in April as September amidst a steep hike in H1B visa fees and
tariff-pause announcements by the US and low reports of fresh tariffs by the US.
domestic CPI inflation print for March 2025 lifted
Overall, the BSE Sensex increased by 3.9 per cent
sentiments. Markets again came under pressure with
in H1:2025-26 (up to September 26). The broader
the escalation of India-Pakistan conflict in early May,
market indices outperformed the benchmark during
but rose sharply thereafter in mid-May, following
H1, with the BSE MidCap and BSE SmallCap index
the announcement of a ceasefire agreement and
gaining by 7.7 per cent and 12.1 per cent, respectively
a record surplus transfer by the Reserve Bank to
(Chart IV.15a). India Volatility Index, a measure of
the Government of India. The rally continued in
short-term expected volatility of Nifty 50, declined by
June aided by the front loading of monetary policy
10.2 per cent during the same period. All BSE sectoral
easing by the Reserve Bank, although a rise in geo-
indices, except BSE Information Technology Index
political tensions in the Middle-East led to some
registered gains during the period (Chart IV.15b).
correction. In July, markets underperformed other
global markets amidst amplified tariff uncertainty After remaining net buyers in Q1:2025-26, FPIs
and mixed corporate earnings results for Q1:2025-26. turned net sellers in Q2. The Domestic Institutional
Equity markets gained in mid-August amidst India’s Investors (DIIs), especially mutual funds, acted as a
sovereign rating upgrade by a major global credit counterbalancing force by remaining net buyers and
rating agency and the announcement of GST reforms, provided resilience to the Indian equity markets.
before negative global cues contributed to market The inflows into mutual funds have been supported
losses in late-August. Investor sentiment revived in by sustained and expanding reach of systematic
early-September, buoyed by the release of higher- investment plans (SIPs). Average monthly contribution
than-expected GDP growth data for Q1:2025-26 and to mutual funds through the SIP route increased to
strong manufacturing and services PMI data releases. ₹27,464 crore in H1:2025-26 (up to August) as against
However, markets declined in the second half of ₹25,905 crore during H2:2024-25 (Chart IV.16).
Chart IV.15: Stock Market Performance
a. Benchmark and Broad Indices Performance Index
(End-March 2025 = 100)
120 112.1
115
110
107.7
105
103.9
100
95
90
85
80
BSE Sensex BSE MidCap BSE SmallCap
Source: Bloomberg.
7711
52-raM-82 52-rpA-70 52-rpA-71 52-rpA-72 52-yaM-70 52-yaM-71 52-yaM-72 52-nuJ-60 52-nuJ-61 52-nuJ-62 52-luJ-60 52-luJ-61 52-luJ-62 52-guA-50 52-guA-51 52-guA-52 52-peS-40 52-peS-41 52-peS-42
b. Performance of BSE Sectoral Indices
(Per cent)
30 25 24.0
20
15
12.613.314.5
1 50 1.41.71.93.13.63.94.35.26.36.36.86.96.97.09.0
0
-5
-10 -7.7
ygolonhceT
noitamrofnI
seitilitU rewoP ytlaeR xeknaB GCMF erachtlaeH ygrenE saG
&
liO
lateM secivreS
laicnaniF
moceleT elbaruD
remusnoC
USP noitacinummoC sdooG
latipaC
slairtsudnI secivreS yranoitercsiD
remusnoC
otuAMonetary Policy Report October 2025
through public issues aggregated to ₹4,430 crore (i.e.,
Chart IV.16 Average Resource Mobilisation in SIPs
about 2.4 per cent of the total primary issuances)
(₹ crore)
30,000 27,464 during H1 (up to August 2025) as against ₹4,664 crore
25,905
in H2:2024-25.
25,000 22,321
IV.2.5 Foreign Exchange Market
18,151
20,000
15,052
The global foreign exchange market experienced
13,623
15,000 12,372
11,352 increased volatility during April–September 2025,
9,409
10,000 reflecting shifts in US policy expectations, evolving
trade frictions, and fluctuating risk sentiments. The
5,000
US dollar, after reflecting weakness in early 2025,
0
remained range-bound with intermittent bouts
of volatility, mirroring the uncertainties around
trade, fiscal, and monetary policy trajectories in
*: Up to August 2025.
the US. In this environment, while most emerging
Source: Association of Mutual Funds of India.
market (EM) currencies recorded appreciations, the
Overall, FPIs were net sellers (₹0.7 lakh crore up
Indian rupee (INR) exhibited two-way movements
to September 26) while DIIs were net buyers (₹3.7
with a depreciating bias. After trading with an
lakh crore up to September 26) in the equity market appreciating bias during April and early May 2025,
during H1:2025-26 (ChartIV.17a.). Resource the INR depreciated in June-September due to the
mobilisation in primary equity markets stood at ₹1.8 escalation in the US-India trade tensions, widening
lakh crore during H1:2025-26 (up to August 2025) as trade deficit and FPI outflows (Chart IV.18a). The
against ₹2.2 lakh crore in H2:2024-25 (Chart IV.17b). INR also experienced higher volatility in Q1 as
The amount raised by small and medium enterprises reflected by the option-implied volatility as well as
72
22-1202:1H 22-1202:2H 32-2202:1H 32-2202:2H 42-3202:1H 42-3202:2H 52-4202:1H 52-4202:2H
*62-5202:1H
Chart IV.17: Institutional Investments and Resource Mobilisation
a. Net Investment in Indian Equities by b. Resource Mobilisation in Equity Markets
Institutional Investors (₹ lakh crore, left scale; ₹ crore, right scale)
(₹ lakh crore)
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-1.0
Note: IPO: Initial Public Offer. QIP: Qualified Institutional Placement. FPO: Follow-on Public Offer.
*: Up to September 26; ^: up to August 2025.
Sources: Capitaline; National Securities Depository Limited; and Securities and Exchange Board of India.
42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA *52-peS
2.2 6,000
2.0
1.8 5,103 4,664 5,000
1.6 4,430
1.4 3,666 4,000
1.2
3,000
1.0 2,456
0.8 2,000
0.6
1,419
0.4 1,000
914
0.2
0.0 0
QIPs & Preferential allotment IPOs, FPOs & Rights
DIIs FPIs of which: SME IPOs/ FPOs (RHS)
32-2202:1H 32-2202:2H 42-3202:1H 42-3202:2H 52-4202:1H 52-4202:2H
^62-5202:1HChapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Chart IV.18: Indian Rupee and Volatility
a. Movements of Indian Rupee, US Dollar b. 1-Month At-the-Money Implied Volatility and
and EM currency Index GARCH Volality
(Index (March 31, 2025 = 100), left scale; (Per cent)
Index (March 31, 2025 = 100), right scale) 8
7
6
5
4.4
4
3.5 3
2
1
0
₹/US$ Emerging market currency index (RHS)
US DXY (RHS) 1-Month At-the-Money (ATM) Implied Volatility GARCH
Note: An increase (decrease) in the index denotes currency appreciation (depreciation).
Sources: Financial Benchmarks India Pvt. Ltd.; Refinitiv Eikon; Bloomberg and Authors’ calculation.
GARCH8 estimates, but volatility moderated in The decline was moderate for longer maturities, as
August as global risk sentiment stabilised and the 12-month premia declined modestly to 2.11 per
markets priced in trade-related risks (Chart IV.18.b). cent in H1 (up to September 26) from 2.25 per cent in
Notwithstanding these movements, the INR remained H2:2024-25.
among the least volatile EM currencies during this
The 40-currency real effective exchange rate (REER)
period, supported by strong fundamentals as evident
of the INR depreciated by 2.6 per cent between March
from a narrower current account deficit, steady
2025 and August 2025 in line with the movement
services exports, resilient private remittances and
robust foreign exchange reserves.
The INR depreciated by 3.5 per cent against the US
dollar on September 26 over end-March 2025, as
opposed to the appreciating trends registered by
several peer EM currencies (Chart IV.19). A few peer
EM currencies like Argentine peso and Turkish lira
however, recorded higher depreciation than INR
during this period.
Forward premia declined sharply at the beginning
of H1:2025-26 and continued to ease till May 2025
but rose moderately thereafter (Chart IV.20). On an
average, the 1-month forward premia eased to 1.94
per cent in H1 (up to September 26) from 2.51 per
cent in H2:2024-25, in tandem with the narrowing
interest rate differential between the US and India.
8 Generalised Autoregressive Conditional Heteroskedasticity (GARCH)
7733
42/tcO/10 42/tcO/52 42/voN/81 42/ceD/21 52/naJ/50 52/naJ/92 52/beF/22 52/raM/81 52/rpA/11 52/yaM/50 52/yaM/92 52/nuJ/22 52/luJ/61 52/guA/90 52/peS/20 52/peS/62
106 106
104 104
102
102
100
100 98
98 96
96 94
92
94
90
92 88
90 86
52/raM/82 52/rpA/11 52/rpA/52 52/yaM/90 52/yaM/32 52/nuJ/60 52/nuJ/02 52/luJ/40 52/luJ/81 52/guA/10 52/guA/51 52/guA/92 52/peS/21 52/peS/62
Chart IV.19: Movements in Major EM Currencies
(Per cent)
11.5
10
6.8 5.1 5.5 5.7
5
1.7
0
-1.5 -1.1 -1.0 -0.4
-5 -3.5 -3.1
-5.8
-10 -8.3
-15
-20
-19.3
-25
September 26, 2025 over end-March 2025
Sources: Financial Benchmarks India Pvt. Ltd.; and Refinitiv Eikon.
osep
enitnegrA
aril
hsikruT
YXD
SU
eepur
naidnI
gnod
esemanteiV
osep
enippilihP
osep
naelihC
haipur
naisenodnI
elbur
naissuR
nauy
esenihC
tiggnir
naisyalaM
thab
dnaliahT
dnar
nacirfA
htuoS
laer
nailizarB
osep
nacixeMMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Overall Financial Conditions
Overall financial conditions eased beginning mid-
March until July with a softening trend observed
across the money, G-sec and corporate bond markets,
as suggested by the financial conditions index based
on twenty Indian financial market indicators9 at
daily frequency. Since August, financial conditions
tightened marginally on account of tightness in
money and corporate bond markets (Chart IV.22).
Overall financial conditions remain benign,
auguring well for domestic economic activity, going
forward.
IV.2.6 Bank and Non-Bank Credit
Bank Credit: Aggregate Trends
in nominal effective terms (Chart IV.21a). The Growth in bank credit moderated in H1:2025-26,
depreciation of INR’s 40-currency REER remained although the recent data shows signs of an uptick.
modest relative to that of some major economies Across bank groups, credit growth of public sector
(Chart IV.21.b). banks (PSBs) remained higher (11.4 per cent) than
Chart IV.21: Trend in Real Effective Exchange Rate (REER)
a. India's 40-Currency REER b. Cross Country Movement in REER
(Per cent, left scale; Index [2015-16 = 100], right scale) (August 2025 over March 2025)
3 110 (Per cent)
2
106
1
102
98.8
0
98
-1 -1.3
-2 -1.4 94
-3 90
Relative Price Effect 40-Currency REER (RHS)
Nominal Exchange Rate Effect Change in REER (m-o-m)
Sources: RBI; and Bank for International Settlements.
9 The chosen indicators represent five market segments, namely (i) the money market; (ii) the G-sec market; (iii) the
corporate bond market; (iv) the forex market; and (v) the equity market. For detailed methodology, refer to Bandyopadhyay,
P., Kumar, A., Kumar, P. and Bhattacharyya, I. (2025), ‘Financial Condition Index for India: A High-frequency Approach’;
Reserve Bank of India Bulletin, June. https://rbi.org.in/Scripts/BS_ViewBulletin.aspx?Id=23451
74
42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
10
5
0
-2.6 -5
-10
-15
-20
anitnegrA yekruT SU anihC aidnI senippilihP napaJ aisenodnI acirfA
htuoS
dnaliahT KU eropagniS aisyalaM aissuR dnalreztiwS aerA
oruE
lizarB ocixeM
Chart IV.20: Movements in INR-USD Forward Premia
(Per cent)
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5 2.3
2.2
2.0 2.1
2.2
1.5
1.0
0.5
1 month 3 months 6 months 12 months
Source: Bloomberg.
42/tcO/10 42/tcO/52 42/voN/81 42/ceD/21 52/naJ/50 52/naJ/92 52/beF/22 52/raM/81 52/rpA/11 52/yaM/50 52/yaM/92 52/nuJ/22 52/luJ/61 52/guA/90 52/peS/20 52/peS/62Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Chart IV.22: Daily Financial Conditions Index for India
(Standard deviation from average since 2012)
1.0
0.5
0.0
-0.5
-1.0
-1.5
Money Government securities Corporate bond Financial conditions index(standardised)
Equity Foreignexchange
Note: The financial conditions index provides a metric based on its historical average; in this context, a zero value corresponds to a financial system operating at the
historical average level of all the financial indicators included in the index. To present the results, standardised index is used.
Source: RBI staff estimates.
that of private sector banks (PVBs) (9.4 per cent), while (y-o-y) as on September 19, 2025 from 13.0 per cent
credit growth of foreign banks decelerated (Chart a year ago, although an uptick in momentum was
IV.23a). On an annual basis (as on September 19, witnessed in Q2 (Chart IV.24).
2025), PSBs continued to account for the largest share
The asset quality of SCBs improved during
of the incremental credit and their share rose further
2025-26 (up to June 2025), with the overall gross
vis-à-vis PVBs and foreign banks (Chart IV.23.b).
non-performing assets (NPA) ratio declining to 2.3
Growth in non-food bank credit of scheduled per cent in June 2025 from 2.7 per cent a year ago
commercial banks (SCBs) decelerated to 10.2 per cent (Chart IV.25a). Asset quality improved across all
7755
4202-01-10 4202-01-31 4202-01-52 4202-11-60 4202-11-81 4202-11-03 4202-21-21 4202-21-42 5202-10-50 5202-10-71 5202-10-92 5202-20-01 5202-20-22 5202-30-60 5202-30-81 5202-30-03 5202-40-11 5202-40-32 5202-50-50 5202-50-71 5202-50-92 5202-60-01 5202-60-22 5202-70-40 5202-70-61 5202-70-82 5202-80-90 5202-80-12 5202-90-20 5202-90-41 5202-90-62
Tighter
conditions
Easier
conditions
Chart IV.23: Credit flow across Bank Groups
a. Growth b. Share in In cremental Credit
(Per cent, y-o-y) (Per cent)
25 100
3.7 2.3
20 90
80
15 38.0
11.4 70 42.3
10 10.4
9.4 60
5 6.9
50
0
40
-5 30 59.7
54.0
-10 20
10
0
20-Sep-24 19-Sep-25
Public sector banks (including regional rural banks) Foreign banks
Private banks (including small finance banks) All SCBs Public sector banks Private sector banks Foreign banks
Source: RBI.
22-raM 22-nuJ 22-peS 22-ceD 32-raM 32-nuJ 32-peS 32-ceD 42-raM 42-nuJ 42-peS 42-ceD 52-raM 52-nuJ 52-peSMonetary Policy Report October 2025
cent in H1:2025-26 from 1.2 per cent in H2:2024-
25 (Chart IV.26a). The growth in adjusted non-food
credit (i.e., non-food bank credit plus non-SLR
investments by banks) was lower at 10.1 per cent in
as on September 2025, as compared to 12.9 per cent
in the previous year (Chart IV.26.b).
As on August 22, 2025, excess holdings of statutory
liquidity ratio (SLR) securities by SCBs decreased to
7.9 per cent of their net demand and time liabilities
(NDTL) from 8.5 per cent at end-March 2025 (Chart
IV.27). Excess SLR holdings are a component of the
liquidity coverage ratio (LCR). They also provide
collateral buffers to banks for availing funds under
the LAF as well as wholesale funding in the triparty
repo and market repo segments.
major sectors, except the agriculture sector (Chart Bank Credit10: A Sectoral Perspective
IV.25.b).
Disaggregated trends in bank credit show moderation
Growth in non-SLR investments of banks (comprising in credit growth across sectors. Although industrial
investments in CPs, bonds, debentures, and shares credit softened, it remained modestly above its
of public and private corporates) increased to 5.3 per historical 10-year average, with nascent signs of
Chart IV.25: Stressed Assets and Non-Performing Assets of SCBs
a. Overall Loan Portfolio of SCBs b. Sectoral Non -Performing Assets
(Per cent) (Per cent)
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3 2.8
2 2.3
Stressed assets ratio Non-performing assets ratio
Source: RBI.
76
12-raM 12-nuJ 12-peS 12-ceD 22-raM 22-nuJ 22-peS 22-ceD 32-raM 32-nuJ 32-peS 32-ceD 42-raM 42-nuJ 42-peS 42-ceD 52-raM 52-nuJ
14
12
10
8
6 6.3
4
2.2
2
2.0
1.2
0
12-raM 12-nuJ 12-peS 12-ceD 22-raM 22-nuJ 22-peS 22-ceD 32-raM 32-nuJ 32-peS 32-ceD 42-raM 42-nuJ 42-peS 42-ceD 52-raM 52-nuJ
Chart IV.24: Non-food Credit Growth of SCBs
(Per cent)
20.0 6.5
17.5 5.0
10.2
15.0 3.5
2.0
12.5
0.5
10.0
-1.0
7.5
-2.5
5.0
-4.0
2.5 -5.5
0.0 -7.0
Momentum (RHS) Base effect (RHS)
y-o-y growth rate
Source: RBI; and Staff estimates.
Agriculture Industry Retail loans Services
32-2202:2Q 32-2202:3Q 32-2202:4Q 42-3202:1Q 42-3202:2Q 42-3202:3Q 42-3202:4Q 52-4202:1Q 52-4202:2Q 52-4202:3Q 52-4202:4Q 62-5202:1Q 62-5202:2Q
10 Overall bank credit and non-food credit data are based on fortnightly Section-42 return, which covers all scheduled commercial banks (SCBs) while
sectoral non-food credit data are based on sector-wise and industry-wise bank credit (SIBC) return, covering select banks accounting for about 95 per cent
of the total outstanding non-food credit extended by all SCBs. Data pertain to the last reporting Friday of the month. Data include the impact of merger
of a non-bank with a bank.Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
growth uptick in recent months (Table IV.7). Despite Within the industrial sector, credit to MSMEs11
moderation in growth, personal loans and services segment continued to remain buoyant, with a
sector credit remained the main drivers of overall significant acceleration in growth during recent
bank credit growth (Chart IV.28 a and b). Agricultural months primarily contributing to its overall growth
and allied activities registered muted credit growth, (Chart IV.29). Some regulatory measures such as
with gradual firming up in recent months. revised guidelines on voluntary pledge of gold and
silver jewellery as collateral for small business loans
Chart IV.27: Excess SLR of Banks as well as the measures announced in the Union
(Per cent of Net demand and time liabilities)
13 60 Budget helped in improving credit flow to the MSME
segment. The revision in MSMEs classification,
50
11
wherein investment limits and turnover thresholds
40
34.7
9 have been raised substantially, also contributed
7.9
30
to high growth in the recent past. In contrast,
7
20
large industry credit registered tepid growth in
5
10 H1:2025-2612.
3 0
Among the major industrial sub-sectors,
infrastructure sector credit growth has been on a
declining path since last year, though there has
Public sector banks Private banks been a marginal improvement since July 2025. On
All SCBs Foreign banks (RHS)
the other hand, credit to all engineering and textile
*: Data up to August 22, 2025
Source: RBI.
segments witnessed stable growth (Table IV.8).
11 Pertains to credit to micro, small and medium segments within industry.
12 H1:2025-26 data up to August 2025.
7777
22-1202
:1Q
22-1202
:2Q
22-1202
:3Q
22-1202
:4Q
32-2202
:1Q
32-2202
:2Q
32-2202:3Q 32-2202:4Q 42-3202
:1Q
42-3202
:2Q
42-3202:3Q 42-3202:4Q 52-4202:1Q 52-4202:2Q 52-4202:3Q 52-4202:4Q 62-5202:1Q
*62-5202:2Q
Chart IV.26: Non-SLR Investment and Adjusted Non-food Credit
a. Non-SLR Investment b. Adjusted Non-Food Credit
(₹ crore) (₹ lakh crore, left scale; Per cent, right scale)
40,000 9.0 17.5
7.5 10.1 15.0
12.5
30,000 6.0
10.0
4.5
7.5
20,000 3.0
5.0
1.5 2.5
10,000 0.0 0.0
0
2024-25 H1: 2024-25 H2: 2024-25 H1: 2025-26
Adjusted non-food credit (quarterly variation)
Bonds/Shares/Debentures Commercial paper Y-o-Y adjusted non-food credit growth (RHS)
Source: RBI.
42-3202:2Q 42-3202:3Q 42-3202:4Q 52-4202:1Q 52-4202:2Q 52-4202:3Q 52-4202:4Q 62-5202:1Q 62-5202:2QMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Table IV.7: Credit Growth (y-o-y, per cent)
Sectors/Sub-Sectors Long- Post- Nov-23 Mar-24 Aug-24 Dec-24 Mar-25 Jul-25 Aug-25
Term* COVID**
Bank Credit 10.9 15.0 20.7 20.2 13.6 11.2 11.0 10.0 10.0
Sectoral Deployment of Bank Credit
Agriculture (13.2) 11.5 14.7 18.1 20.0 17.7 12.5 10.4 7.3 7.6
Industry (22.6) 4.2 7.9 6.1 8.5 9.7 7.2 7.7 6.0 6.5
Micro and small (5.1) 8.5 15.9 16.9 14.7 13.4 9.8 8.8 21.0 20.9
Medium (2.1) 12.9 19.1 12.0 13.3 19.2 19.9 18.6 14.7 13.1
MSMEs (7.2) 9.5 16.8 15.4 14.3 15.1 12.7 11.7 19.1 18.5
Large (15.5) 2.7 4.9 2.9 6.4 7.7 5.1 6.2 0.9 1.8
Infrastructure (7.5) 3.9 4.3 2.3 6.6 3.7 1.0 1.4 1.9 2.1
Services (29.1) 13.9 18.1 25.7 23.5 13.9 11.7 12.4 10.6 10.6
Services excluding NBFCs (20.2) 12.5 18.8 29.6 28.1 14.9 14.3 15.8 14.5 14.2
NBFCs (8.9) 19.0 17.2 18.9 15.3 11.9 6.7 5.7 2.6 3.4
Personal loans (35.1) 17.8 19.7 30.0 27.5 13.9 12.0 11.7 11.9 11.8
Personal loans with unchanged risk weight (23.8) 17.3 19.6 32.6 31.9 14.3 12.7 13.2 13.8 13.8
Housing (Including Priority Sector Housing) (17.6) 17.1 20.0 36.7 36.5 13.1 11.1 10.7 9.6 9.7
Vehicle loans (3.7) 18.1 15.4 20.6 17.6 14.5 8.8 8.6 8.9 8.7
Education (0.8) 8.1 16.4 23.0 23.7 18.4 15.8 15.1 15.0 14.6
Personal loans with increased risk weight (11.3) 19.2 20.1 25.3 19.7 13.2 10.7 8.6 8.1 7.9
Credit cards (1.6) 25.2 23.8 34.2 25.6 19.9 15.6 10.6 5.6 4.4
Other personal loans (8.7) 20.8 19.6 24.9 20.7 12.3 9.2 8.0 8.1 8.1
Notes: 1. Provisional data.
2. Bank credit data is based on fortnightly Section-42 return, which covers all scheduled commercial banks, while sectoral non-food credit data
are based on sector-wise and industry-wise bank credit (SIBC) return, which covers select banks accounting for about 95 per cent of the total
outstanding non-food credit extended by all SCBs, pertaining to the last reporting Friday of the month.
3. *: Average of growth from August 2015 to August 2025.
4. **: Average of growth from April 2022 to August 2025
5. Figures in parentheses against each sector denote share in total non-food credit as per the latest data.
Source: RBI.
Chart IV.28: Sectoral Deployment of Bank Credit
a. Non-food Credit Growth: Sector-wise b. Contribution to Non-food Credit Growth
(Per cent, y-o-y) (Percentage points)
20
18
16
14
12 11.8
10.6
10 9.9
8 7.6
6 6.5
4
Source: RBI.
78
42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
15
10
4.1
5
3.1
1.5
1.0
0
Non-food credit Agriculture Industry
Services Personal loans
42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
Agriculture Industry
Services Personal loansChapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Chart IV.30: Credit Growth of Services Sector:
Contribution of Major Sub-components
(Percentage points)
16
12
10.6
8 4.8
1.1
4 1.4
0.5
2.8
0
Trade Professional services
Commercial real estate NBFCs
Other services* Services (per cent, y-o-y )
Note: *: Other services include all services excluding trade, professional services,
commercial real estate and NBFCs.
Source: RBI.
Although growth of credit to the services sector average, with segments such as trade and commercial
moderated during H1:2025-26, a gradual strengthening real estate recording healthy growth (Chart IV.30 and
has been recorded in recent months (Chart IV.30). Tables IV.7 & IV.9).
Non-banking finance companies (NBFCs) remained
Credit growth in the personal loans segment remained
the largest recipient of bank credit within the
buoyant although decelerating from last year, with
services sector, and there are signs of improvement housing and vehicle loans being the major contributors
in credit to NBFCs following the withdrawal of the (Chart IV.31). In the backdrop of exuberant growth in
additional risk weights w.e.f. April 01, 202513. On certain components of consumer credit, risk weights
the other hand, credit to services excluding NBFCs were raised on unsecured personal loans in November
expanded at a steady pace above its long-term 2023. This prudential measure contributed to a sharp
Table IV.8: Credit Growth in Major Sub-sectors of Industry (y-o-y, per cent)
Growth Aug-24 Sep-24 Dec-24 Mar-25 Jun-25 Jul-25 Aug-25
Infrastructure 3.7 2.1 1.0 1.4 -0.5 1.9 2.1
Basic metal and metal product 16.1 15.4 13.1 12.8 11.0 9.5 8.9
Textiles 6.4 5.4 5.6 8.3 8.6 6.0 6.4
Chemicals and chemical products 15.9 14.9 7.0 7.4 6.3 5.5 6.7
All engineering 16.6 15.7 19.5 22.1 22.3 23.1 19.9
Food processing 14.4 11.6 10.7 5.1 8.1 5.2 6.1
Low High
Note: Within a row, darker shade of green pertains to acceleration in credit growth, while red indicates deceleration in credit growth.
Source: RBI
13 https://rbidocs.rbi.org.in/rdocs/notification/PDFs/NT120A97A4D3CBCCE4AEBAAE1B7DB7DCF177D.PDF
7799
42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
Chart IV.29: Credit Growth of Industrial Sector:
Contribution as per Size of Industries
(Percentage points)
12
10
8
6.5
6
1.3
4
5.2
2
0
Source: RBI.
42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
MSMEs Large Industry (per cent, y-o-y)Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Table IV.9: Impact of Change in Risk Weights on Credit Growth (y-o-y, per cent)
Growth Nov-23 Mar-24 Aug-24 Mar-25 Apr-25 May-25 Jun-25 Jul-25 Aug-25
Personal loans
25.3 19.7 13.2 8.6 9.7 8.2 7.9 8.1 7.9
(with change in risk weight)
NBFCs (with change in risk weight)* 18.9 15.3 11.9 5.7 2.9 -0.3 2.6 2.6 3.4
Personal loans
32.6 31.9 14.3 13.2 12.9 12.6 13.6 13.8 13.8
(no change in risk weight)
Services excluding NBFCs
29.6 28.1 14.9 15.8 14.4 13.3 12.4 14.5 14.2
(no change in risk weight)
Low High
Notes: 1. *Risk weights were restored for NBFCs in April 2025.
2. Within a row, darker shade of green pertains to acceleration in credit growth, while red indicates deceleration in credit growth.
Source: RBI
moderation, with growth in unsecured personal Though there has been a moderation in bank credit
lending declining to about one-third of its level in growth, total credit to the economy remained resilient,
November 2023. Personal loans with unchanged risk supported by strong non-bank intermediation.
weights grew at a robust pace (Table IV.9). Housing Resource mobilisation by non-financial corporates
loans, which constitute nearly half of the lending through market instruments such as corporate bond
under personal loans, remained range bound while
issuances and commercial papers has increased.
growth of vehicle loans decelerated.
The deceleration in bank credit growth, therefore,
may be interpreted in the context of a broader and
increasingly diversified credit ecosystem, wherein
Chart IV.31: Personal Loans: Contribution of
Major Sub-components non-bank channels have also emerged as key sources
(Percentage points)
of funding.
16
14
NBFCs Credit14
12 11.8
10 Despite some deceleration in lending, NBFCs'
5.7
8 credit growth remained strong at double-digit
6 0.9
levels. Industrial credit, which forms the dominant
0.2
4
portion of NBFCs' credit portfolio, displayed stable
5.0
2
growth, underscoring the importance of NBFCs
0
as a crucial conduit for extending credit to the
economy. Lending to retail loans and services
segments expanded at a healthy pace in H1:2025-2615
contributing to overall credit deployment by NBFCs
(Chart IV.32).
14 Data on sectoral deployment of outstanding credit from select NBFCs pertain to last day of every month. As a pilot work, the collection of monthly
sectoral credit information from select NBFCs has been initiated. These NBFCs represent around 88 per cent of total credit extended by all NBFCs in upper
and middle layers.
15 H1:2025-26 data up to August 2025.
80
42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
Housing Credit card outstanding
Vehicle loans Other personal loans**
Note: **: Other personal loans include all personal loans except housing, credit
card outstanding and vehicle loans.
Source: RBI.Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Chart IV.32: Sectoral Contribution of NBFCs’
Credit Growth
(Percentage points)
18
16
14
12.1
12
10
5.4
8
6
2.5
4
2 4.2
0.1
0
Source: RBI.
8811
42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
to the policy rate cuts and moderation in cost of
funds (Chart IV.33a). The decline in deposit rates
has been mainly led by bulk deposits in the wake of
large surplus liquidity conditions and moderation in
credit demand (Chart IV.33.b).
Since the onset of the current easing cycle in February
2025, banks have adjusted their repo-linked lending
rates downward by 100 bps. The marginal cost of funds-
based lending rate, which has a longer reset period,
has also declined. The 1-year median marginal cost
of funds-based lending rate of scheduled commercial
banks softened by 40 bps during February-August 2025.
Consequently, the weighted average lending rates on
Agriculture Industry Services fresh and outstanding rupee loans declined by 58 bps
Retail loans Non-food credit
(interest rate effect accounts for 71 bps)16 and 55 bps,
respectively, during the same period. On the deposit
IV.3 Transmission to Lending and Deposit Rates side, the weighted average domestic term deposit
rates on fresh and outstanding deposits declined by
Transmission of the cumulative policy rate cut of
106 bps and 22 bps, respectively (Table IV.10).
100 basis points to lending and deposit rates has
been quick in the current easing cycle commencing The share of the external benchmark-based lending
February 2025. Banks have adjusted their lending and rate linked loans in total outstanding floating rate
deposit rates downwards in H1:2025-26 in response loans of scheduled commercial banks increased to
Chart IV.33: Transmission to Banks’ Lending and Deposit Rates during Feb-Aug 2025
a. Lending Rates (WALR) b. Deposit Rates (WADTDR)
(Basis points) (Basis points)
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-22
-40 -40
-55
-60 -60
-58
-80 -80
-100 -100 -100 -100
-106
-120 -120
Feb-25 Mar-25 Apr-25 May-25 Jun-25 Jul-25 Aug-25 Feb-25 Mar-25 Apr-25 May-25 Jun-25 Jul-25 Aug-25
Repo rate Outstanding loans Fresh loans Repo rate Outstanding loans Fresh loans
WALR: Weighted average lending rate; WADTDR: Weighted average domestic term deposit rate.
Source: RBI.
16 The interest rate effect can be arrived at by keeping the weight constant, with the residual change in the weighted average landing rate attributed to
the weight effect.Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Table IV.10: Transmission to Banks’ Deposit and Lending Rates
(Basis points)
Period Repo Rate Term Deposit Rates Lending Rates
WADTDR WADTDR EBLR 1-Yr. MCLR WALR WALR
Fresh Deposits Outstanding (Median) Fresh Rupee Loans Outstanding
Deposits Rupee Loans
Retail Retail Retail Overall Interest
Deposits and Bulk and Bulk Effect Rate
Deposits Deposits Effect#
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Tightening Period +250 190 259 206 250 175 182 191 115
May 2022 to Jan 2025
Easing Phase -100 -64 -106 -22 -100 -40 -58 -71 -55
Feb 2025 to Aug 2025
Memo
Jun – 2025 -50 -26 -36 -7 -50 -5 -58 -30 -23
Jul – 2025 0 -11 -14 -8 0 -15 19 -4 -6
Aug – 2025 0 -7 -5 -5 0 -15 -6 -11 -6
Notes: Data on EBLR pertain to 32 domestic banks.
# : At constant weight.
WALR: Weighted average lending rate; WADTDR: Weighted average domestic term deposit rate; MCLR: Marginal cost of funds-based lending rate;
EBLR: External benchmark-based lending rate.
Sources: MPD06 return; and RBI.
62.9 per cent as at end-June 2025 from 61.6 per cent banks extend a large part of their loans at external
as at end-March 2025. Consequently, the share of benchmark-based lending rates (Chart IV.34.b). The
marginal cost of funds-based lending rates linked marginal cost of funds-based lending rates and other
loans declined (Table IV.11). Increasing share of legacy rates – based on internal benchmarks and
loans linked to external benchmark has quickened having longer reset periods – act as an impediment to
faster policy transmission.
the pace of transmission to lending rates.
Bank group-wise, the transmission to weighted
Public sector banks still have a significant proportion
average lending rates on fresh and outstanding rupee
of their loans linked to marginal cost of funds-based
loans of private banks was higher than that of public
lending rates (Chart IV.34a). On the other hand, private
sector banks (Chart IV.35a). As alluded to earlier, the
Table IV.11: Share of Outstanding Floating Rate
large share of external-benchmark based loans led to
Loans across Interest Rate Benchmarks
better transmission in case of private banks compared
Regime June 2024 March 2025 June 2025
to public sector banks. However, lending rates of
MCLR 38.2 34.9 33.8
private banks remained above those of public sector
EBLR 57.9 61.6 62.9
banks (Chart IV.35.b). The maximum pass-through
Others 3.9 3.5 3.3
to lending rates was witnessed among foreign banks,
Notes: 1. ‘Others’ include benchmark prime lending rate, base rate and
other internal benchmarks. reflecting their higher share of external benchmark-
2. Data pertain to 74 scheduled commercial banks.
3. EBLR: External benchmark-based lending rate; MCLR: Marginal based lending rates and higher share of low-cost and
cost of funds-based lending rate.
wholesale deposits of lower maturity.17
Source: RBI.
17 The proportion of external benchmark-based lending rate linked loans was the highest for foreign banks (93.5 per cent), followed by private banks
(87.9 per cent) and public sector banks (47.2 per cent) as at end-June 2025.
82Chapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
Sectoral analysis shows that the transmission to banks/sectors towards higher interest rate slabs may
lending rates on fresh and outstanding loans has been reduce the extent of transmission during and easing
broad-based. The pace of transmission varied across cycle. Hence, changes in the weighted average lending
sectors due to varying proportion of credit portfolios rate may be decomposed into interest rate effect and
linked to fixed and floating interest rates and volume effect for assessing transmission to lending
differential spreads charged by banks. Even though rates, especially on fresh loans during a policy cycle.18
lending rates moderated, the shifts in volumes across During the current easing cycle (Feb-Aug 2025), the
Chart IV.35: Bank Group-wise Transmission to Lending Rates
a. Transmission to Lending Rates b. Lending Rates of Domestic Banks
(Basis points) (Per cent)
0 11
10 9.55
-20
9.44
9 8.88
-40
8 8.06
-47
-60 -53 -55
-58 7
-63
-80 -76 6
-84
-100
-107
-120 WALR (Fresh rupee loans)-PSBs
PSBs PVBs FBs SCBs PSBs PVBs FBs SCBs WALR (Fresh rupee loans)-PVBs
WALR WALR 1-Year median MCLR-PSBs
(Fresh rupee loans) (Outstanding loans) 1-Year median MCLR-PVBs
Notes: PSBs: Public sector banks; PVBs: Private banks; FBs: Foreign banks; SCBs: Scheduled commercial banks; WALR: Weighted average lending rate; MCLR: Marginal cost
of funds-based lending rate.
Source: RBI.
8833
22-yaM 22-guA 22-voN 32-beF 32-yaM 32-guA 32-voN 42-beF 42-yaM 42-guA 42-voN 52-beF 52-yaM 52-guA
Chart IV.34: Outstanding Floating Rate Rupee Loans of SCBs across Interest Rate Benchmarks
a. Public Sector Banks b. Private Banks
(Per cent) (Per cent)
100
80
60
40
20
0
MCLR External benchmark Others
Notes: 1. MCLR: Marginal cost of funds-based lending rate.
2. Data pertains to end-June 2025.
3. ‘Others’ include benchmark prime lending rate, base rate and other internal benchmarks.
Source: Ad-hoc survey.
erutlucirgA egraL yrtsudnI sEMSM erutcurtsarfnI edarT gnisuoH elciheV noitacudE rehtO snaoL
lanosreP
100
80
60
40
20
0
erutlucirgA egraL yrtsudnI sEMSM erutcurtsarfnI edarT gnisuoH elciheV noitacudE rehtO snaoL
lanosreP
MCLR External benchmark Others
18 The interest rate effect can be arrived at by keeping the weight constant, with the residual change in the weighted average landing rate attributed to
the weight effect.Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart IV.36: Sector-wise Transmission to Weighted Average Lending Rates
(Feb - Aug 2025)
a. Fresh Rupee Loans b. Outstanding Rupee Loans
(Basis points) (Basis points)
20
0
-20
-40
-36
-60 -49
-80 -70 -58
-77
-100 -82 -87 -89 -83
Interest rate effect Volume effect Transmission
Sources: MPD06 return; and RBI.
volume effect partially dampened transmission domestic bank groups, public sector banks charged a
in large industry and vehicle loans, whereas it lower spread than private banks for housing, vehicle,
complemented interest rate effect in other sectors, education, and other personal loans. Public sector
thereby enhancing transmission in these sectors banks, however, charged a higher spread for micro,
(Chart IV.36). small and medium enterprises loans as compared to
private banks.
For external benchmark-based lending rate loans,
banks have increased their spreads (charged over Non-banking financial companies have been
and above the benchmark rate), which dampened playing an increasingly important role in meeting
the extent of transmission (Table IV.12). The spread the credit needs of the economy. They extend the
on fresh rupee loans was the highest for education last mile credit to hitherto unbanked areas and
loans, followed by other personal loans, and micro, provide niche financing to various sectors ranging
small and medium enterprises loans. Among from real estate and infrastructure to agriculture
Table IV.12: Spread of Weighted Average Lending Rates on Fresh Rupee Loans*
Sectors Jan-25 Aug-25
Public sector Private Domestic Public sector Private Domestic
banks banks banks banks banks banks
MSME Loans 3.43 3.12 3.20 3.48 3.33 3.36
Personal Loans
Housing 2.09 2.44 2.34 2.11 2.51 2.37
Vehicle 2.63 4.03 3.07 2.69 4.26 3.01
Education 3.84 4.76 4.41 3.42 5.55 4.55
Other personal loans 3.01 5.38 3.36 3.30 5.31 3.58
Note: Other personal loans include loans other than housing, vehicle, education and credit card loans.
* : Calculated over the repo rate for loans linked to external benchmarks.
Sources: MPD06 return; and RBI staff estimates.
84
erutlucirgA yrtsudnI
egraL
sEMSM erutcurtsarfnI noitacudE elciheV gnisuoH rehtO snaoL
lanosreP
llarevO erutlucirgA yrtsudnI
egraL
sEMSM erutcurtsarfnI noitacudE elciheV gnisuoH rehtO snaoL
lanosreP
llarevO
20
0
-20
-25 -23
-40
-35 -41
-60
-59 -55
-80
-75
-83 -100 -92
Interest rate effect Volume effect TransmissionChapter IV Liquidity Conditions and Financial Markets
and micro loans. Thus, non-banking financial
companies enhance the reach of the credit channel
of monetary transmission. The lending rates of non-
banking financial companies generally tend to be
higher than those of commercial banks. This reflects,
inter alia, their liability structure and the risk
profile of their borrowers. The degree of monetary
policy transmission, therefore, differs between
non-banking financial companies and scheduled
commercial banks (Chart IV.37).
Across bank groups, the pass-through to weighted
average domestic term deposit rates on fresh and
outstanding deposits was higher for public sector
banks than private banks during February-August 2025
(Chart IV.38a). Interest rates on fresh retail deposits (Chart IV.38.b). The interest rates on savings bank
moderated across tenors, although the extent varied deposits that comprise about 30 per cent of total
Chart IV.38: Deposit Rates and Banks’ Profitability
a. Transmission to Term Deposit rates* b. Transmission to Fresh Retail Term
(Basis points) Deposits - Tenor wise*
(Basis points)
Outstanding Fresh Fresh
(Retail and bulk) (Retail) (Retail and bulk)
c. Savings Deposit Rates of SCBs# d. Net Interest Margin (NIM) and CASA Share of SCBs
(Per cent) (Per cent)
Repo rate Minimum savings deposit rate
Maximum savings deposit rate
Notes: PSBs: Public sector banks; PVBs: Private banks; FBs: Foreign banks; SCBs: Scheduled commercial banks; WADTDR: Weighted average domestic term deposit rate;
CASA: Current account and savings account; NIM: Net interest margin.
*: Transmission is calculated for the period February-August 2025. #: Savings deposit rates pertain to five major banks and relate to account balances of up to Rs 1 lakh.
Sources: MPD06 return; and RBI.
8855
syad
41
- 7
syad
03
- 51
syad
54-
13
syad
09
- 64
syad
081-
19
syad
463
- 181
sraey
2
- 1
sraey
3
- 2
0
-20 -20 -17 -22 -200
-40 -40 -36 -42 -41 -37 -29
-60 -58 -60 -48
-80 -72 -69 -64 -1- 080 0 -91 -72
-86
-100 -99 -98 -105 -106
-120
PSBs PVBs FBs SCBs PSBs PVBs FBs SCBs PSBs PVBs FBs SCBs
7.0 45 3.8
6.0 3.7
5.5 40
5.0 3.6
4.0 35 3.5
3.0 3.4
2.5
2.0 30 3.3
3.2
25
3.1
20 3.0
Mar-24 Jun-24 Sep-24 Dec-24 Mar-25
CASA Share NIM (RHS)
91-naJ-81 91-nuJ-82 91-ceD-60 02-yaM-51 02-tcO-32 12-rpA-20 12-peS-01 22-beF-81 22-luJ-92 32-naJ-60 32-nuJ-61 32-voN-42 42-yaM-30 42-tcO-11 52-raM-12 52-guA-92
Chart IV.37: Monetary Policy Transmission to
Outstanding Lending Rates of NBFCs
(Basis points)
0
-11
-20
-40
-55
-60
-80
-100
-100
-120
Feb-25 Mar-25 Apr-25 May-25 Jun-25 Jul-25 Aug-25
Policy repo rate SCBs NBFCs
Sources: Ad-hoc survey; and RBI.
-120Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Table IV.13: Interest Rates on Small Savings Instruments – Q3:2025-26
Small Savings Scheme Maturity Spread$ Average G-sec Formula-based Government Difference
(years) (Percentage yield# rate of Interest Announced Rate of (Percentage
point) (Per cent) (Per cent) Interest (Per cent) point)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) = (3) + (4) (6) (7) = (6) - (5)
Savings Deposit - - 4.00 -
Public Provident Fund 15 0.25 6.58 6.83 7.10 0.27
Term Deposits
1 Year 1 0 5.46 5.46 6.90 1.44
2 Year 2 0 5.62 5.62 7.00 1.38
3 Year 3 0 5.79 5.79 7.10 1.31
5 Year 5 0.25 6.12 6.37 7.50 1.13
Recurring Deposit Account 5 0 5.79 5.79 6.70 0.91
Monthly Income Scheme 5 0.25 6.09 6.34 7.40 1.06
Kisan Vikas Patra 115 Months 0 6.58 6.58 7.50 0.92
NSC VIII issue 5 0.25 6.26 6.51 7.70 1.19
Senior Citizens Saving Scheme 5 1.00 6.12 7.12 8.20 1.08
Sukanya Samriddhi Account Scheme 21 0.75 6.58 7.33 8.20 0.87
$: Spreads for fixing small saving rates as per the Government of India Press Release of February 2016.
#: Based on semi-annualised yield on G-sec of corresponding maturity for the period Jun-Aug 2025.
Note: Compounding frequency varies across instruments.
Sources: Government of India; Financial Benchmarks India Pvt. Ltd; and RBI staff estimates.
deposits have also declined in the current easing IV.4 Conclusion
cycle (Chart IV.38.c). Banks are generally prompt in
System liquidity remained in surplus during H1 on the
reducing their savings deposit rates in an easing cycle. back of Reserve Bank’s liquidity augmenting measures
Large surplus liquidity amidst moderation in credit and increase in government spending. Domestic
demand enabled banks to transmit rate cuts faster financial markets remained resilient amidst increased
to their liability side, which helped them to manage volatility in global financial markets induced by trade
and geopolitical uncertainties. Money market rates
their margins effectively (Chart IV.38.d).
moved in tandem with the policy repo rate. Long
The Government of India reviewed the interest
term bond yields eased at the beginning of the year
rates on various small savings instruments, which but hardened from June onwards amidst domestic
are linked to secondary market yields on G-secs of developments and global cues. Indian equity markets
comparable maturities and kept them unchanged for demonstrated resilience and generally maintained an
Q3:2025-26. This led to a widening of gap between upward trajectory with intermittent corrections. The
INR remained range-bound in Q1 but came under
the interest rates on most small saving instruments
depreciating pressures in Q2. The credit market
and their formula-based rates (Table IV.13). The
registered robust transmission with lending and
widening gaps may be limiting the transmission of
deposits rates declining faster in the current easing
policy rates to banks’ deposit rates, especially in an
cycle. Going forward, the Reserve Bank will remain
easing cycle, because of the potential substitution
agile and nimble in liquidity management operations
effect. A large interest rate differential in favour of
to ensure adequate liquidity in the system to meet
small savings could lead to a migration of deposits the productive requirements of the economy while
away from banks. safeguarding financial stability.
86Chapter V External Environment
V. External Environment
Global growth remains below its long-term average and is projected to decelerate in 2025 amid elevated
uncertainties and higher tariffs. Inflation continues to moderate but remains above target for several economies
with recent upticks observed in some advanced economies. Central banks remain cautious in normalising monetary
policy as they assess the unfolding impact of tariffs. Financial markets stay volatile responding to shifting policy
signals, even as equities rebounded strongly. Trade policy uncertainty, geoeconomic fragmentation, lingering
geopolitical risks, stretched equity valuations, rising fiscal concerns and inflation persistence pose downside risks
to the global growth outlook.
The global economy, growing below its long-term policy support in some economies could support
average, is projected to slow in 2025. The near-term global growth during the rest of H2. Trade deals
growth outlook is clouded by trade policy uncertainty, struck during the year so far have lowered trade
geoeconomic fragmentation, geopolitical risks, and policy uncertainty but it remains elevated. In its
financial market volatility. The recent uptick in World Economic Outlook update of July 2025, the
inflation, particularly in advanced economies (AEs), International Monetary Fund (IMF) revised up its
coupled with unfolding impact of high tariffs has global growth projections to 3.0 per cent from 2.8
impeded the disinflation process, posing risks to per cent for 2025, and to 3.1 per cent from 3.0 per
price stability. Consequently, central banks have cent for 2026. EMEs face several challenges ranging
adopted a cautious approach in their policy decisions from weaker global growth, trade policy uncertainty
carefully weighing incoming data. Global financial to climate-related disruptions which could adversely
markets remained volatile, reflecting shifting risk affect their economic prospects.
perceptions amid elevated trade policy uncertainty.
Among AEs, the US economy has remained resilient
Equity markets scaled new highs driven by tech
despite some fragility in its labour market. Real
stocks. Short-term bond yields generally softened in
GDP grew by 3.8 per cent [quarter-on-quarter
anticipation of rate cuts. Long-term yields have risen
seasonally adjusted annualized rate (q-o-q, saar)]
in AEs on fiscal concerns but declined in emerging
in Q2:2025, rebounding from the contraction of
market economies (EMEs), as investors seeking
0.6 per cent in the first quarter (Table V.1). The
portfolio diversification show renewed interest in
growth in Q2 was propelled by lower net imports
EME assets. The US dollar has weakened, reflecting
and strong consumer spending, partially offset by
trade policy uncertainty, fiscal imbalances, fragile
decline in investment. Labour market showed signs
investor confidence, and shifting expectations about
of weakness as additions to non-farm payrolls in
the rate cut by the Federal Reserve.
August were underwhelming. The unemployment
V.1 Global Economic Conditions
rate also edged up to 4.3 per cent, but remained low.
In 2025 so far, global economic activity has remained In August, the US Composite Purchasing Managers
resilient. High frequency indicators for Q3:2025 Index (PMI) remained robust supported by a buoyant
point to a tepid manufacturing activity, but services services sector and recovery in manufacturing
sector remain buoyant. Monetary easing and other activity. Consumer sentiment, as measured by the
8877Monetary Policy Report October 2025
University of Michigan survey, retreated in August
Table V.1: Real GDP Growth
(Per cent)
on inflation fears even as readings remained above
April-May 2025 levels. Going forward, economic
Country Q3- Q4- Q1- Q2- 2024 2025 2026
2024 2024 2025 2025 (P) (P) activity will depend largely on how well the US
Quarter-on-quarter, seasonally adjusted, annualised rate (q-o-q, saar)
absorbs tariff related pass-throughs and the course
Canada 2.4 2.1 2.0 -1.6 of monetary policy.
Euro area 1.6 1.6 2.3 0.5
Japan’s GDP grew by 2.2 per cent (q-o-q, saar) in
Japan 2.3 2.1 0.3 2.2
Q2:2025, driven by consumer spending amid tariff
South Korea 0.4 0.3 -0.9 2.7
headwinds and political uncertainty. The Composite
UK 0.0 0.4 3.0 1.4
PMI at 52.0 in August showed buoyant private sector
US 3.3 1.9 -0.6 3.8
activity, albeit driven by services. High inflation,
(Year-on-year)
weaker exports and a volatile currency remain key
Advanced Economies
challenges for the economy.
Canada 1.9 2.3 2.3 1.2 1.6 1.6 1.9
Real GDP growth in the Euro area decelerated in Q2
Euro area 0.9 1.3 1.6 1.5 0.9 1.0 1.2
to 0.5 per cent (q-o-q, saar) from 2.3 per cent in Q1,
Japan 0.8 1.2 1.7 1.7 0.2 0.7 0.5
marking the weakest quarter since Q4:2023 as GDP
South Korea 1.4 1.1 0.0 0.6 2.0 0.8 1.8
contracted in Germany and Italy. Labour markets,
UK 1.2 1.5 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.4
however, stayed resilient with unemployment steady
US 2.8 2.4 2.0 2.1 2.8 1.9 2.0
at around 6.2 per cent. The Composite PMI stayed
Emerging Market Economies
in expansion zone, driven by services. Looking
Brazil 4.1 3.6 2.9 2.2 3.4 2.3 2.1
ahead, higher defence and infrastructure spending,
China 4.6 5.4 5.4 5.2 5.0 4.8 4.2
accompanied by easing of inflationary pressures,
India 5.6 6.4 7.4 7.8 6.5 6.4 6.4
should support growth.
Indonesia 5.0 5.0 4.9 5.1 5.0 4.8 4.8
GDP growth in the UK moderated to 1.4 per cent
Philippines 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.7 5.5 5.9
(q-o-q, saar) in Q2:2025 from 3.0 per cent in Q1, due
Russia 3.3 4.5 1.4 1.1 4.3 0.9 1.0
to a weak production sector. The unemployment rate
South Africa 0.4 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.5 1.0 1.3
at 4.7 per cent in Q2 remained at a four-year high.
Thailand 3.0 3.3 3.2 2.8 2.5 2.0 1.7
The UK Composite PMI at 53.5 in August indicated
Memo:
resilient private sector activity as services sector
World 2024 2025 (P) 2026 (P)
remained a pillar of strength amidst conclusion of
Year-on-year
US-UK trade deal. Elevated levels of services inflation
Output 3.3 3.0 3.1
and persistent softness in manufacturing, however,
Trade volume 3.5 2.6 1.9
remain a cause of concern.
P: Projection
Notes: 1. India’s data correspond to fiscal year (April-March); e.g., 2025 Amongst major EMEs, some have shown signs of
pertains to April 2025-March 2026.
weakness including Brazil and Russia as elevated
2. Projections for 2025 and 2026 are taken from the IMF WEO, July
2025 update. tariffs are likely to have an adverse impact on
Sources: Official statistical agencies; Bloomberg; International
growth. The Chinese economy, however, remained
Monetary Fund World Economic Outlook Update, July 2025 and RBI staff
estimates. resilient, expanding by 5.2 per cent year-on-year (y-o-y)
88Chapter V External Environment
in Q2, marking a slight slowdown from 5.4 per quarter. Business confidence in Russia weakened in
cent in Q1. The property sector woes continue to August, as manufacturing activity remained tepid as
weigh on growth momentum. Property investments indicated by the PMI.
plunged, while retail sales and industrial output
The ASEAN economies are navigating a challenging
remained sluggish in Q3. China's exports remained
landscape. The Asian Development Bank in July
resilient as shipments to ASEAN1 increased in the
revised down Southeast Asia's growth projections to
wake of tariffs. Policymakers undertook both fiscal
4.2 per cent from 4.7 per cent for 2025; for 2026 it
and monetary measures to bolster economic activity.
was revised down to 4.3 per cent from 4.7 per cent.
Deflation, a languishing property sector, subdued
Growth in BRICS2 economies, except India, is likely
consumer expenditure and trade policy uncertainty
to remain subdued as these economies grapple with
pose downside risks to China’s growth prospects
multiple domestic headwinds as alluded to earlier
during the rest of H2.
(Table V.2). A challenging external environment
Brazil’s GDP growth decelerated to 2.2 per cent might aggravate country-specific risks.
(y-o-y) in Q2:2025 from 2.9 per cent in Q1 due to
Turning to high frequency indicators, the
moderation in domestic spending and investment.
Organisation for Economic Co-operation and
The labour market, however, remained tight as
Development’s composite leading indicator showed
the unemployment rate continued to fall, reaching
that most economies remained above the long-term
5.6 per cent in the quarter ending July. Private
trend during Q3:2025 (up to August) (Chart V.1a).
sector activity remained weak in Q2 and Q3 (up to
The Global Composite PMI remained in expansion
August) as indicated by the Composite PMI. Political
zone during April – August 2025, with services
uncertainty ahead of the 2026 elections and weather-
being the main driver of growth (Chart V.1b). Global
related events pose further downside risks to Brazil’s
Manufacturing PMI, however, remained in the
growth amidst a challenging external environment.
contraction zone in April and May before expanding
Economic recovery in South Africa remained fragile
marginally in June and again in August.
as its GDP grew by 0.6 per cent (y-o-y) in Q2:2025,
down from 0.8 per cent in the previous quarter, The US tariff announcements since April 2025 and
due to slower gross fixed capital formation. Both the subsequent bilateral trade deals have introduced
consumer confidence and business confidence in Q2 far-reaching shifts in global trade dynamics, posing
reflected overall pessimism, along with labour market significant risks to the free flow of goods across the
pressures that have remained acute during the year globe. Despite these jolts to international trade,
so far, with the unemployment rate edging up in global merchandise trade volume grew for six
Q2. The Composite PMI showed modest expansion consecutive quarters up to Q2:2025, and it continued
in private sector activity in Q3 (up to August). In to grow in Q3:2025 (July 2025), with faster growth
Russia, growth led by defence spending has been in 2025 so far. The growth, however, hides the
cooling off, with its GDP growing by 1.1 per cent in weakness in trade as it was primarily driven by
Q2:2025, slowing from 1.4 per cent in the previous front-loading before the US tariff hikes came into
1 Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) includes Brunei, Cambodia, Indonesia, Laos, Malaysia, Myanmar, Philippines, Singapore, Thailand, and
Vietnam.
2 The BRICS includes group of 10 countries - Brazil, China, Egypt, Ethiopia, India, Indonesia, Iran, Russian Federation, South Africa, and United Arab
Emirates.
8899Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Table V.2: Select Macroeconomic Indicators for BRICS
Real GDP growth rate Country 2024 2025(P) 2026(P) General Government Country 2024 2025(P) 2026(P)
(y-o-y, per cent) gross debt
Brazil 3.4 2.3 2.1 Brazil 87.3 92.0 96.0
(per cent of GDP)
Russia 4.3 0.9 1.0 Russia 20.3 21.4 22.5
India 6.5 6.4 6.4 India 81.3 80.4 79.6
China 5.0 4.8 4.2 China 88.3 96.3 102.3
South Africa 0.5 1.0 1.3 South Africa 76.4 79.6 81.7
CPI inflation rate Country 2024 2025(P) 2026(P) Current account Country 2024 2025(P) 2026(P)
(y-o-y, per cent) balance (per cent of
Brazil 4.4 5.3 4.3 Brazil -2.8 -2.3 -2.2
GDP)
Russia 8.4 9.3 5.5 Russia 2.9 1.9 1.8
India 4.6 4.2 4.1 India -0.6 -0.9 -1.4
China 0.2 0.0 0.6 China 2.3 1.9 1.7
South Africa 4.4 3.8 4.5 South Africa -0.6 -1.2 -1.4
General Government Country 2024 2025(P) 2026(P) Forex reserves* Country 2023 2024 2025
net lending/borrowing (in US$ billion)
Brazil -6.6 -8.5 -7.7 Brazil 355.0 329.7 350.8
(per cent of GDP)
Russia -2.2 -1.0 -1.2 Russia 598.6 609.1 689.5
India -7.4 -6.9 -7.2 India 622.5 635.7 702.6
China -7.3 -8.6 -8.5 China 3449.7 3455.6 3602.1
South Africa -6.1 -6.6 -6.1 South Africa 62.5 65.5 69.2
P: Projection
*: Forex reserves for 2025 pertain to July for all countries except for Brazil and Russia (August 2025) and India (September 19).
Notes: 1. India’s data correspond to fiscal year (April-March) except data on forex reserves which are as per calendar year.
2. Projections for 2025 and 2026 are taken from the IMF WEO, July 2025 update.
Sources: Official statistical agencies; World Economic Outlook April 2025 database and July 2025 Update, IMF; International Reserve and Foreign Currency
Liquidity (IRFCL), IMF; and RBI.
effect (Chart V.2a). The emerging market economies the global ocean freight container pricing index that
were the major drivers of growth in Q2 and Q3 measures 40-feet container prices – trended below
(up to July 2025). The Freightos Baltic Global Index – the 2024 average during most of 2025 (Chart V.2b).
Chart V.1: Survey Indicators
a. OECD Composite Leading Indicators b. Composite PMI
(Index) (Index)
102
101.6
101.2
101
100.8
100.4
100
99.7
99
US UK Germany US UK Global
China India China (Caixin) Euro area
Sources: Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD); and Bloomberg.
90
42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
56
54.6
54 53.5
52.9
52 51.9
51.0
50
48
46
42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guAChapter V External Environment
Chart V.2: World Trade Volume
a. World Trade Volume: Relative Contribution b. World Trade Volume and Freightos Baltic Global Index
(Percentage point) (Per cent, left scale; Index, right scale)
6.0 5.4 6500
5.0 7.0
4.0 2.9 5.4 5500
3.0 4.0 4500
2.0
1.0 2.4 1.3 3500
1.0
0.0
2500
-1.0
-2.0
-2.0 2072.1 1500
-3.0
-4.0 -5.0 500
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Jul
2022 2023 2024 2025
AEs EMEs World trade growth (y-o-y) World trade (m-o-m)
World trade growth (per cent, y-o-y) Freightos Baltic Global Index (RHS)
Sources: CPB Netherlands; Refinitiv Eikon; and RBI staff estimates.
The World Trade Organisation’s latest Goods Trade commodity prices, particularly in energy and metals.
Barometer for June 2025 indicates that strong trade Prices softened in July as energy and industrial metal
volume growth witnessed before the implementation prices declined due to oversupply and weak demand.
of higher US tariffs might slow down during the Commodity prices rose in August and September
rest of 2025. In August 2025, the World Trade driven by precious metals on safe haven demand
Organisation projected world merchandise trade to amid elevated uncertainty (Chart V.3a). According to
grow by 0.9 per cent in 2025, an improvement from the Food and Agriculture Organization, global food
the 0.2 per cent contraction estimated in April 2025, prices firmed up modestly in Q2, primarily due to
mainly reflecting front-loading of imports in the US.
rise in dairy and meat prices, partially offset by the
It, however, revised down the growth projection for
fall in sugar and cereal prices. Food prices edged up
2026 to 1.8 per cent from the previous estimate of
in Q3 (up to August) as gains in meat and vegetable
2.5 per cent.
oil prices outweighed declines in cereals and sugar
V.2 Commodity Prices and Inflation (Chart V.3b).
Global commodity prices exhibited volatility in Q2, Crude oil prices have generally remained subdued
on account of geopolitical tensions and uncertainty since April 2025 on the OPEC+ decision to raise
surrounding US tariffs. As measured by the Bloomberg production. The OPEC+ reversed its previous strategy
Commodity Price Index, commodity prices fell in of production cuts, opting instead to phase out 2.2
April mainly due to a decline in energy and base million barrels per day of voluntary output reductions.
metal prices reflecting a bleak demand outlook. Oil prices firmed up in June and July as geopolitical
The fall continued in May led by lower agricultural risks rose, driving up prices before the de-escalation
prices. In June, announcements of new US tariffs of conflict between Iran and Israel led to a softening of
increased global uncertainty, engendering spike in prices in Q2. Oil prices remained range-bound in Q3
9911
32-rpA 32-nuJ 32-guA 32-tcO 32-ceD 42-beF 42-rpA 42-nuJ 42-guA 42-tcO 42-ceD 52-beF 52-rpA 52-nuJ 52-guAMonetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart V.3: Commodity Prices
a. Bloomberg Commodity Price Index b. Food Price Indices
[Index (end-2023 = 100)] [Index (2014-16=100)]
170
160
150 152.6
140
130.1
130
128.0
120
110 105.6
100
Sources: Food and Agriculture Organisation; World Bank; Bloomberg; and Petroleum Planning and Analysis Cell, Ministry of Petroleum & Natural Gas, Government of
India.
amid ample supply and weak global growth outlook Consumer Price Inflation
(Chart V.3c).
Global consumer price inflation continued to
Metal prices exhibited a mixed trend in Q2, influenced moderate gradually, though at an uneven pace. While
by fluctuating demand-supply dynamics in China disinflation slowed in AEs, it continued in EMEs
and global economic conditions, including US trade with China facing deflation. Persistent tightness in
policies. Base metal prices remained subdued in Q3 labour markets kept underlying inflation elevated
due to weak demand from China. As per the World in many economies, though softening commodity
Gold Council data, the demand for gold surged to prices contained the rise. Headline inflation remains
1249 tonnes in Q2, a 3.0 per cent (y-o-y) rise, fuelled above central bank targets in several countries as
by strong investment demand – mainly into exchange well as above their pre-pandemic levels. As per IMF’s
traded funds (ETFs) – due to safe-haven demand World Economic Outlook (July 2025 update), global
amidst global uncertainties. Globally, central banks headline inflation is projected at 4.2 per cent for 2025
added 166 tonnes of gold to official reserves further and 3.6 per cent for 2026 (Table V.3). Accordingly,
boosting its demand. Gold prices remained elevated central banks in AEs remain focused on ensuring
in Q3, surging to all time high in September (Chart that inflation returns to target, while considering
V.3d). risks to output and employment. Many EMEs are
92
42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
Food Meat Cereals Dairy
c. Energy and Crude Oil Prices d. Metal Price Indices
(US$ per bbl, left scale; Index, right scale) (Index (end-2023=100), left scale; (Index (end-2023=100), right scale)
90 130
85 120
110 80 96.3 100
75 88.1 90
70 69 8. 01 68.2
65 70
60 60
42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
185
125 18 11 7.8 0
119.8 115 155 113.0 1101.490
105
125 95 110
85 95
Brent Crude Oil Indian basket
Energy Price Index (RHS) Natural Gas index (RHS) Copper Aluminium Zinc Gold (RHS)
42-naJ-5 42-beF-9 42-raM-51 42-rpA-91 42-yaM-42 42-nuJ-82 42-guA-2 42-peS-6 42-tcO-11 42-voN-51 42-ceD-02 52-naJ-42 52-beF-82 52-rpA-4 52-yaM-9 52-nuJ-31 52-luJ-81 52-guA-22 52-peS-62
110
108
106 105.1
104
102
100
98
96
94
92
90
42-naJ-50 42-beF-90 42-raM-51 42-rpA-91 42-yaM-42 42-nuJ-82 42-guA-20 42-peS-60 42-tcO-11 42-voN-51 42-ceD-02 52-naJ-42 52-beF-82 52-rpA-40 52-yaM-90 52-nuJ-31 52-luJ-81 52-guA-22 52-peS-62Chapter V External Environment
pursuing monetary easing to support growth amidst Inflation in EMEs has been broadly moderating since
easing inflation pressures. the April MPR. The risk of deflation is evident across
several Asian economies, driven by a combination of
In the US, the disinflation process slowed as both
subdued demand, sluggish wage growth and excess
headline and core inflation witnessed an uptick in
supply.
Q2 and Q3 with elevated shelter costs. The headline
In Brazil, inflation moderated from 5.5 per cent in
CPI and core inflation (y-o-y) rose to 2.9 per cent
March to 5.1 per cent in August, driven by lower
and 3.1 per cent, respectively, in August up from 2.4
inflation in transport, and falling food prices, amidst
per cent and 2.8 per cent in March 2025, marking
high interest rates (Chart V.4c). Core inflation in
the highest levels since February. The recent uptick
Brazil, however, picked up from 4.9 per cent in March
partly reflects the impact of tariffs and their pass-
to 5.4 per cent during June-August (Chart V.4d). South
through to core components. Inflation, measured by
the personal consumption expenditure (PCE) price
Table V.3: Consumer Price Inflation
index — the Federal Reserve’s preferred inflation
(Y-o-y, Per cent)
metric — also witnessed a similar uptick, rising from
Country Inflation Q3: Q4: Q1: Q2: Jul - Aug -
2.4 per cent in March to 2.7 per cent in August (Chart Target 2024 2024 2025 2025 25 25
V.4a). Core PCE inflation registered an increase from Advanced Economies
Canada 2.0 ± 1.0 2.0 1.9 2.3 1.8 1.7 1.9
2.7 per cent in March to 2.9 per cent in August (Chart
Euro area 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.0 2.0 2.0
V.4b).
Japan 2.0 2.8 2.9 3.8 3.5 3.1 2.7
In the UK, headline inflation rose to 3.8 per cent in
South Korea 2.0 2.1 1.6 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.7
August from 2.6 per cent in March 2025, reaching
United Kingdom 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.8 3.5 3.8 3.8
the highest level since January 2024 due to elevated
CPI - 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.5 2.7 2.9
United
services inflation. Core inflation also remained States
PCE 2.0 2.4 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.6 2.7
elevated.
Emerging Market Economies
In the Euro area, headline inflation marginally Brazil 3.0 ± 1.5 4.4 4.8 5.0 5.4 5.2 5.1
declined from 2.2 per cent in March to 2.0 per cent Russia 4.0 8.9 9.0 10.1 9.8 8.8 8.1
India 4.0 ± 2.0 4.2 5.6 3.7 2.7 1.6 2.1
in August, aligning with the European Central Bank’s
China 2.0 0.5 0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.0 -0.4
target of 2.0 per cent. Inflation in the Euro area was
South Africa 3.0 - 6.0 4.3 2.9 3.0 2.9 3.5 3.3
driven by food and services, partially offset by weak
Mexico 3.0 ± 1.0 5.0 4.5 3.7 4.2 3.5 3.6
energy prices. Core inflation (excluding energy,
Indonesia 2.5 ± 1.0 2.0 1.6 0.6 1.8 2.4 2.3
food, alcohol, and tobacco) remained steady at 2.3
Philippines 3.0 ± 1.0 3.2 2.6 2.3 1.4 0.9 1.5
per cent since May, after moderating from 2.7 per
Thailand 1.0 - 3.0 0.6 1.0 1.1 -0.3 -0.7 -0.8
cent in April. In Japan, CPI inflation excluding fresh
Turkey 5.0 ± 2.0 54.4 46.7 39.8 36.1 33.5 33.0
food — the Bank of Japan's prefered inflation metric
Memo:
— declined from 3.2 per cent in March to 2.7 per
2023 2024 2025 2026
cent in August. Headline CPI inflation decelerated (P) (P)
to 2.7 per cent in August from 3.6 per cent in World consumer price inflation 6.6 5.6 4.2 3.6
March, primarily due to subdued electricity prices P: Projection
Note: Inflation target for China is around 2.0 per cent for 2025
(Chart V.4b). Sources: Central bank websites; IMF; and Bloomberg.
9933Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Africa saw a rise in headline inflation from 2.7 per contrast, disinflation is continuing in EMEs (Chart
cent to 3.3 per cent over the same period, whereas V.5a & b).
core inflation remained steady at around 3.0 per cent
V.3 Monetary Policy Stance
during March-August. In Russia, headline inflation
moderated from 10.3 per cent in March to 8.1 per cent During Q2 and Q3, central banks adopted
in August. Inflation, however, remains elevated and divergent monetary policy paths, driven by their
well above the target of 4.0 per cent. domestic growth-inflation dynamics and other
macroeconomic developments amidst rising global
China remained in deflation during February-May
tariffs. Continued disinflation in some major EMEs
before registering a meagre price rise of 0.1 per cent
and a soft US dollar has provided EMEs with space
in June and no change in the consumer price index in
for monetary easing.
July. However, prices fell again by 0.4 per cent largely
due to lower food prices. The core inflation broadly The Federal Reserve maintained a pause on its target
remained steady across EMEs.
range for the federal funds rate in all the meetings
Since the April 2025 MPR, the final phase of during January – July. In September, the Federal Open
disinflation has been prolonged with a noticeable Market Committee lowered the range by 25 basis
slowdown in disinflation process in major AEs. In points (bps) to 4.00-4.25 per cent in view of rise in
Chart V.4: CPI Inflation (y-o-y) – Select Economies
a. Advanced Economies - Headline b. Advanced Economies - Core
(Per cent) (Per cent)
US (PCE) Euro area Target
UK Japan US (PCE) UK Euro area Japan
c. Emerging Market Economies - Headline d. Emerging Market Economies - Core
(Per cent) (Per cent)
9.0
8.1
7.0
5.0 5.1
3.0 3.3
2.1
1.0
-1.0 -0.4
Brazil Russia China Brazil Russia China
South Africa India South Africa India
94
42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.8
3.5 3.0 2.7
2.5 2.7
2.0 2.0
1.5
1.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
5.0 5.4
3.0 4.2
3.1
1.0
0.9 -1.0
42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5 3.6 3.3
3.0 2.9
2.5 2.3
2.0
1.5
1.0
42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
Notes: 1. For India, core CPI, i.e., CPI excluding food and fuel is worked out by eliminating the groups 'food and beverages' and 'fuel and light' from the headline CPI.
2. Chart V.4b refers to CPI inflation in all items less fresh food and energy.
Sources: Official statistical agencies; Bloomberg; and RBI staff estimates.Chapter V External Environment
downside risks to employment. The Committee also inflationary pressures. The European Central Bank
stated that in considering additional adjustments to continued with the easing cycle, lowering its key rates
the target range for the federal funds rate, it would by 25 bps each in April and June 2025 meetings. In Q3,
carefully assess incoming data, the evolving outlook, the bank kept the rates unchanged. The Bank of Japan
and the balance of risks. As per the summary of maintained status quo over the last five meetings,
economic projections released in the September 2025, after hiking by 25 bps in January 2025 (Chart V.6a).
the Committee expected the target range for the
Among other AEs, Australia reduced its policy rate in
federal funds rate to be at 3.50-3.75 per cent by the end
May and August as inflation eased. Canada reduced
of 2025, indicating two more rate cuts of 25 bps each.
its policy rate by 25 bps in September considering a
In September 2025, the Federal Reserve revised its
weaker economy and less upside risk to inflation. New
monetary policy framework. The revised framework
Zealand lowered its policy rate by 75 bps during April-
removed effective lower bound as a defining feature
August 2025 on benign inflation outlook. Norway
of the framework, returned to flexible inflation
undertook a cautious easing of monetary policy,
targeting by abandoning average inflation targeting
cuting rate by 50 bps during 2025 as inflation evolved
and de-emphasised the 'shortfall' from the maximum
as projected and unemployment increased somewhat.
employment.
South Korea and Switzerland each have delivered rate
The Bank of England reduced its policy rate by 25 bps cut of 25 bps since April whereas Sweden reduced the
each in May and August 2025 to support economic benchmark rate by 50 bps during the same period.
activity amidst flagging growth in the second quarter Israel has kept the policy rate unchanged since
and uncertainty surrounding the global trade order February 2024. Elevated uncertainty surrounding
despite the successful conclusion of a trade deal with global trade negotiations has made central banks
the US. The Bank of England, however, maintained cautious, complicating decisions on rate cut. Futures
status quo in September in view of renewed and Overnight Index Swap (OIS) markets, however,
Chart V.5: Last Mile of Disinflation
a. Advanced Economies b. Emerging Market Economies
(Per cent) (Per cent)
0.7
Japan 1.2 -1.9
India -0.7
0.0
Euro
0.2 -1.2
South Africa
-1.8
UK 1.8
0.6 Russia 4.1
6.3
US 0.4 0.7 Brazil 2.1
2.5
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5
-3 0 3 6
August 2025 Inflation Deviation from Target August 2025 Inflation Deviation from Target
March 2025 Inflation Deviation from Target March 2025 Inflation Deviation from Target
Note: For Brazil, India, and South Africa the target is taken as the midpoint of their inflation control target range.
Sources: Bloomberg; and RBI staff estimates.
9955Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart V.6: Policy Rate Changes – Select Major Economies
a. Advanced Economies b. Emerging Market Economies
(Basis points) (Basis points)
50
50
-50
-50
-75
-100
-150 -125 -125
-175
-200
-250 -225 -250 -250
-350 -325
Source: Bloomberg
3 The Chinese authorities intensified policy support through targeted fiscal measures to bolster consumers spending.
96
SU KU aera
oruE
napaJ adanaC nedewS yawroN cilbupeR
hcezC
ailartsuA dnalaeZ
weN
dnalecI aeroK
htuoS
325
450 100
300
150
0
-150 -45
-100 -125 -150 -125 -300
-250
-450 -375 -350 -425 -375
lizarB aissuR aidnI anihC acirfA
htuoS
ocixeM elihC yragnuH senippilihP aibmoloC aisenodnI ureP
H1:2024 H2:2024 Q1:2025 H1:2024 H2:2024 Q1:2025
Q2:2025 Q3:2025 (upto Sep 26, 2025) Q2:2025 Q3:2025 (upto Sep 26, 2025)
Chart V.7: Market Implied Path of Policy Rates
(Per cent)
4.5
4.0
3.64
3.5
3.27
3.24
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.85
1.5
US UK Euro area Australia
Notes: 1. The chart is as on Sep 26, 2025.
2. Market implied policy rates are overnight indexed swap rates for
US, UK, Australia, and Euro area.
Source: Bloomberg
52-luJ 52-guA 52-peS 52-tcO 52-voN 52-ceD 62-naJ 62-beF 62-raM 62-rpA 62-yaM 62-nuJ 62-luJ
are pricing in lower policy rates in major AEs going with subdued inflation. It, however, kept the policy
forward (Chart V.7). rate unchanged at 2.75 per cent in its September
meeting. Indonesia eased rates by 100 bps during
Monetary policy in EMEs remained broadly supportive
May-September to support growth and stabilize its
of growth as inflation pressures eased, with Brazil
currency amid declining inflation. The Philippines
being a notable exception. Among the BRICS, Brazil
raised its policy rate by a total of 275 bps to 15.0 per
cent during January – June 2025 before pausing in July
and September, as inflationary pressures remained
persistent. On the contrary, Russia has reduced interest
rate cumulatively by 400 bps during 2025 so far. China
reduced its loan prime rates by 10 bps in May but left
them unchanged thereafter as the economy remained
resilient, adopting a wait-and-watch approach. In this
regard, China has preferred structural support over
repeated rate cuts.3 South Africa reduced rates by 25
bps each in May and July amid concerns over weak
growth and moderation of inflation expectations.
In Asia, Malaysia cut its policy rate by 25 bps in
July – the first reduction in five years – citing trade
uncertainty, as the economy remained resilientChapter V External Environment
lowered rates in April, June and August as inflation The US dollar depreciated sharply since April, on
fell to a multi-year low. Thailand cut the interest fiscal sustainability worries, trade policy uncertainty,
rate in April and August by 25 bps each to combat and concerns over autonomy of institutions, while
deflation. In Latin America, monetary policy was most EME currencies strengthened.
broadly accommodative with Mexico leading rate
Global equity markets fell sharply in April after the
cuts among its peers. Many Latin American central
announcement of reciprocal tariffs by the US. Markets
banks have been frontrunning the Fed, as a softer
rebounded subsequently as the implementation
US dollar provided additional policy space to support
of tariffs was postponed and bilateral trade deals
growth. Mexico extended its easing cycle with a 150
were signed. As measured by the MSCI World Index,
bps rate cut between May and September. Colombia
equity markets gained by 18.1 per cent during April
maintained a pause after a 25 bps rate cut in April.
- September 2025, reflecting gains in both AEs and
Chile cut its rate by 25 bps in July amid global trade
EMEs (Chart V.8a). Among AEs, S&P 500 in the US
policy uncertainty, marking the first cut in 2025. Peru
exhibited heightened volatility in April due to higher
cut the policy rate by 25 bps in May and September
policy uncertainty (Chart V.9b). The subsequent easing
each. Among the key European EMEs, Hungary kept
of trade tensions, however, spurred a sharp rebound
rates unchanged through 2025, whereas Poland eased
in equity markets. The upward trajectory continued
intermittently, by cutting its policy rate by a total of
in rest of Q2, supported by the US-China trade deal
100 bps in 2025 so far (Chart V.6b).
amid intermittent bout of volatility stemming from
V.4 Global Financial Markets the Israel-Iran conflict. Later, increased bets on rate
cuts by the Fed (Chart V.9a) and strong performance
Notwithstanding divergent trends in the real
by technology companies further drove the index to
economy, financial markets remain buoyant across
record levels in August and September. Valuations in
countries with bouts of volatility amidst uncertainty
equity markets, however, remain stretched. Overall,
around trade policy, the Federal Reserve’s rate
the S&P 500 Index rose by 18.4 per cent from April
decisions and geopolitical tensions. After a sharp fall
to September.
in April, global financial markets rebounded strongly
through Q2 and Q3, driven by a reassessment of tariff European stocks began Q2 on a tumultuous note
risks to be less severe than initially anticipated. Equity as announcements of steep tariffs led to selling
markets surged to record highs in many economies, pressures. They ended the quarter on a subdued
supported by optimism surrounding de-escalation of note as lingering trade uncertainty and a strong euro
the tariff war and an easing of geopolitical tensions. triggered risk-off sentiment. In Q3, european stock
Enthusiasm over artificial intelligence drove strong markets performed better than in Q2, boosted by the
gains in technology stocks. Government bond yields trade deal towards end-July and a steady inflation
in many AEs rose, reflecting rising concerns about print. European equities, however, remained
the debt sustainability. Tariff-induced inflation underwhelming compared to its peers due to weak
pressures also kept monetary policy restrictive, second-quarter corporate earnings and downgrading
exerting additional upward pressure on yields. In of France’s sovereign credit score by Fitch amid
contrast, yields softened in many EMEs, as investors political uncertainty (Chart V.8b). The UK’s stock
rebalanced portfolios away from traditional safe- indices performed better than European markets,
haven assets towards higher-yielding EME securities. supported by its improving economy and the Bank
9977Monetary Policy Report October 2025
Chart V.9: Sources of Uncertainty: Monetary and Economic Policy
a. Probability of Rate cut for the Federal b. US Uncertainty Indicators
Reserve December Meeting (Index, left scale;Index, right scale)
(Per cent) 8,000
550
7,000
6,000 450
5,000 350
4,000 306.9
3,000 250
2684.9
2,000
150
1,000
0 50
Trade Policy Uncertainty Index
Baseline 1 Cut 2 Cuts Economic Policy Uncertainty Index (RHS)
Note: In chart 9a, baseline refers to no change in policy rate of the US while the pace of rate cut is assumed to be 25 bps.
Sources: Bloomberg; and CME FedWatch.
98
42-naJ 42-beF 42-raM 42-rpA 42-yaM 42-nuJ 42-luJ 42-guA 42-peS 42-tcO 42-voN 42-ceD 52-naJ 52-beF 52-raM 52-rpA 52-yaM 52-nuJ 52-luJ 52-guA
80.0
70.0
60.0 65.4
50.0
40.0 31.5
30.0
20.0
10.0 3.1
0.0
42-voN-01 42-ceD-21 52-naJ-31 52-beF-41 52-raM-81 52-rpA-91 52-yaM-12 52-nuJ-22 52-luJ-42 52-guA-52 52-peS-62
Chart V.8: Equity Markets
a. Equity Indices (MSCI) b. Change in Equity Indices
[Index (end-2023=100)] (Per cent)
Euro area (Euro Stoxx 50)
Japan (Nikkei)
UK (FTSE)
US (S&P 500)
Brazil (Ibovespa)
India (Sensex)
China (SSE Index)
South Africa (JSE Index)
World AEs EMEs Q2:2025 Q3:2025 (upto Sep 26, 2025)
Sources: Bloomberg; and RBI staff estimates.
of England’s rate cuts. It helped the Financial Times its peers in Q2 as trade deal uncertainty made investors
Stock Exchange reach record levels. It scaled new cautious. Following the interim agreement, however,
heights in Q3 as global investors diversified their Chinese stocks outperformed in Q3, supported by
portfolios. Japanese markets outperformed other AEs various government stimulus measures and growth
in both quarters, buoyed by the US–Japan trade deal, in tech stocks. Brazil’s equity market gained during
a weakening yen, and strong corporate earnings. April-September with occasional pullbacks driven
by shifting global sentiment, political uncertainty
Among EMEs, China’s equity market underperformed
ahead of the 2026 elections, and soft commodity
decnavdA
tekram
gnigremE
seimonoce
seimonoce
134.9
135
134.4
130 129.5
125
120
115
110
105
100
95
90
42-naJ-5 42-beF-9 42-raM-51 42-rpA-91 42-yaM-42 42-nuJ-82 42-guA-2 42-peS-6 42-tcO-11 42-voN-51 42-ceD-02 52-naJ-42 52-beF-82 52-rpA-4 52-yaM-9 52-nuJ-31 52-luJ-81 52-guA-22 52-peS-62
1.0
3.7
13.7 12.0
2.1
6.0
10.6
7.1
6.6 4.7
-3.8 8.0
3.3
11.1
8.8
10.7
-4 0 4 8 12Chapter V External Environment
prices. Equity market in India rallied in Q2; however, hardened toward the end of September following
the imposition of a 50 per cent US tariff dampened a significant upward revision to GDP numbers and
investor sentiment, leading to a 3.8 per cent decline tracking changes in rate cut expectations. UK yields
in India’s equity index (BSE Sensex) in Q3 despite hardened in Q3 on fiscal concerns ahead of the
rating upgrade by S&P Global in August. autumn budget, diminishing rate-cut expectations,
and renewed inflationary pressures. The German
Sovereign bond yields across major AEs largely
10-year bund yields also firmed up as spending on
declined in Q2, reflecting continued monetary
defence and infrastructure was expected to rise, while
policy easing. In the UK, 10-year yields fell as the
the US–EU trade deal reduced demand for bunds
government moved toward shorter-term borrowing
as a safe-haven asset. The Japanese government
amidst slowing growth. Japanese bond yields also
bond yields rose in Q3 amidst political uncertainty
declined, as government bond issuance was expected
and elevated inflation. The Bank of Japan’s gradual
to be trimmed and the Bank of Japan signalled
reduction in bond purchases also exerted hardening
a more cautious approach to interest rate hikes
pressure on yields.
considering tariff risks. In contrast, US Treasury
yields firmed up due to the introduction of the ‘One In contrast, 10-year sovereign bond yields in many
Big Beautiful Bill’ which raised concerns about fiscal EMEs largely eased since the last MPR, as investors
sustainability and fears of increased bond supply diversified away from traditional safe-haven assets
(Chart V.10a). In the US, yields, particularly the due to policy uncertainty triggered by the US tariffs. At
30-year, spiked after the passing of the bill by the the same time, several EME central banks supported
Congress and an upward revision of inflation growth by reducing policy rates. In China, however,
projections by the FOMC in June. Yields, however, government stimulus measures and ongoing trade
eased through most of Q3 on rising expectations of negotiations fueled risk-on sentiment. As a result,
rate cuts, driven by weak employment data. They investors shifted to equity from bonds, leading to rise
Chart V.10: 10-Year Sovereign Bond Yields
a. Select AEs b. Select EMEs
(Per cent) (Per cent)
5
4.7
4.2
4
3
2.7
2
1.7
1
0
US UK Japan Germany Brazil India China South Africa
Source: Bloomberg.
9999
42-naJ-50 42-beF-90 42-raM-51 42-rpA-91 42-yaM-42 42-nuJ-82 42-guA-20 42-peS-60 42-tcO-11 42-voN-51 42-ceD-02 52-naJ-42 52-beF-82 52-rpA-40 52-yaM-90 52-nuJ-31 52-luJ-81 52-guA-22 52-peS-62
15
13.7
13
11
9 9.2
7 6.5
5
3
1.9
1
42-naJ-50 42-beF-90 42-raM-51 42-rpA-91 42-yaM-42 42-nuJ-82 42-guA-20 42-peS-60 42-tcO-11 42-voN-51 42-ceD-02 52-naJ-42 52-beF-82 52-rpA-40 52-yaM-90 52-nuJ-31 52-luJ-81 52-guA-22 52-peS-62Monetary Policy Report October 2025
in yields (Chart V.10b). Globally, US treasury yields effects on EME yields, particularly in medium and
exert sizeable and statistically significant spillover long-term maturities (Box V.1).
Box V.1: Pass-through of US Treasury Yields to Emerging Market Bond Yields
Chart V.1.1: Emerging Markets Yields Movements
Index
a. 3 Month Yields b. 2 Year Yields c. 10 Year Yields
300 5000 250 800 160 140
4500 700 140 120
250 4000 200
600 120
3500 100
200
3000 150 500 100 80
150 2500 400 80
2000 100 300 60 60
100
1500 200 40 40
1000 50
50
500 100 20 20
0 0 0 0 0 0
Mexico Brazil Mexico Brazil Mexico Brazil
India South Africa India South Africa India South Africa
US (RHS) US (RHS) US (RHS)
Note: Yields have been indexed to Q1 of 2011
Sources: Reuters; and Bloomberg.
(Contd.)
4 The EMEs country list here includes Brazil, Colombia, India, Mexico, the Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, and Thailand. For the 30-year tenor,
the sample spans Q4:2015 to Q2:2025 for eight countries (excluding Poland), while a 15-year tenor is used for Colombia due to data limitations.
100
1102:2Q 3102:2Q 5102:2Q 7102:2Q 9102:2Q 1202:2Q 3202:2Q 5202:2Q 1102:2Q 3102:2Q 5102:2Q 7102:2Q 9102:2Q 1202:2Q 3202:2Q 5202:2Q 1102:2Q 3102:2Q 5102:2Q 7102:2Q 9102:2Q 1202:2Q 3202:2Q 5202:2Q
The pass-through of US financial conditions to emerging quarterly data spanning Q1:2011 to Q2:20254, with the
market economies (EMEs) is a major conduit of global following specification
financial spillovers, with movements in US Treasury
Y α β r β CPI β FB β US β Ex δ ε
yields playing a pivotal role. In fact, US monetary it it it it t it i it
policy significantly shapes international bond markets Y: =E M +E b1ond + yi2elds, r+: c3entra +l ba4nk p +o li5cy ra t+e , C +P I:
t t t
(Albagli et al., 2018), and decline in long-term US yields consumer price inflation (year-on-year), FB: fiscal
t
boost foreign ownership of EME debt (Moore et al.,
balance to GDP ratio, US: US bond yields, Ex: change
t t
2013). Moreover, US treasury yields are also found
in exchange rate (year-on-year) δ: country fixed effect,
to have large effects on AEs’ government bond yields i
i indexes country, t indexes time, ε : idiosyncratic error
(Avalos et al., 2025). Yield movements in EMEs are it
term.
suggestive of spillover impact from US Treasury yields
(Chart V.1.1). The impact of domestic macroeconomic indicators
is on expected lines. US treasury yields have the
To assess the pass-through of US yields to the short-
term (3-month), medium-term (2-year), and long-term strongest spillover impact on 10-year tenor, with
(10-year and 30-year) maturities of EMEs, a dynamic noticeable effects on the 2-year and 30-year maturities;
panel GMM (Ogaki, 1999) is estimated based on however, the impact on 3-month yields is negligible.Chapter V External Environment
System GMM Results – EMEs Government Bond underscore the sensitivity of EME debt markets to US
Yields financial conditions.
Variable 3M Yield 2Y Yield 10Y Yield 30Y Yield References:
Policy rate 0.943*** 0.196*** 0.115*** 0.069***
Albagli, E., Ceballos, L., Claro, S., & Romero, D.
CPI -0.082 0.168*** 0.108*** 0.048
(2018). “Channels of US monetary policy spillovers to
Fiscal balance
0.029 -0.036* -0.048*** -0.060**
to GDP international bond markets”. BIS Working Papers No
US yield 0.610 0.407*** 0.534*** 0.381** 719, 2018.
Exchange Rate 0.009 -0.004** -0.010*** 0.001
Moore, J., Nam, S., Suh, M., & Tepper, A. (2013).
Constant 0.005 -0.016 -0.028 0.007
Notes: 1. p < 0.01 = ***, p < 0.05 = **, p < 0.1 = * “Estimating the Impacts of U.S. LSAPs on Emerging
2. Presumed exogenous variables are the policy rate and fiscal
Market Economies’ Local Currency Bond Markets”.
balance. The model specification is consistent with the
Hansen J-test of instrument validity. Federal Reserve Bank of New York staff report no. 595,
3. A positive fiscal balance means fiscal surplus and negative
2013.
balance means fiscal deficit. Similarly, a positive change in
exchange rate means appreciation and negative change means
Avalos, F., Todorov, K., & Xia, D. (2025). “US spillovers
depreciation.
amid macroeconomic divergence”. BIS Quarterly
This maturity-specific impact indicates that while
Review, March 2025.
domestic factors anchor short-term rates, US yields
exert greater influence on term premia and long-term Ogaki, M., (1999). “GMM Estimation Techniques”.
yields that can reduce the diversification benefits Ch.2 in Generalized Method of Moments Estimation.
for international investors. Overall, the findings Cambridge University Press, 1999.
In the currency market, the US dollar remained first half of May after depreciating in April, supported
subdued, while emerging market currencies gained by the US–China interim trade deal and strong
as investors diversified towards emerging market employment data. In the latter half of Q2, however,
assets (Chart V.11a). The US dollar rebounded in the the dollar depreciated significantly as investors grew
Chart V.11: Currency Movements and Capital Flows
a. Currency Indices b. Portfolio Flows to EMEs
Index (end-2023=100) (US$ billion)
107
106
105
103
101
99
97 97
95
MSCI EME Currency Index US Dollar Index Debt Equity Total
Sources: Bloomberg; Institute of International Finance; and RBI staff estimates.
110011
42-naJ-50 42-beF-90 42-raM-51 42-rpA-91 42-yaM-42 42-nuJ-82 42-guA-20 42-peS-60 42-tcO-11 42-voN-51 42-ceD-02 52-naJ-42 52-beF-82 52-rpA-40 52-yaM-90 52-nuJ-31 52-luJ-81 52-guA-22 52-peS-62
12
6
0.2
-4.1
-4.4
-6
-12
-18
-24
42-naJ-5 42-beF-9 42-raM-51 42-rpA-91 42-yaM-42 42-nuJ-82 42-guA-2 42-peS-6 42-tcO-11 42-voN-51 42-ceD-02 52-naJ-42 52-beF-82 52-rpA-4 52-yaM-9 52-nuJ-31 52-luJ-81 52-guA-22 52-peS-62
0Monetary Policy Report October 2025
wary of its safe-haven appeal amidst rising public to local developments, including political instability
debt concerns. In July, the dollar appreciated on in Indonesia, renewed tariff risks in Latin America,
optimism surrounding multiple trade agreements India and weak Chinese economic data.
and the de-escalation of conflict between Iran and
V.5 Conclusion
Israel, easing fears of potential US involvement.
The global macroeconomic environment remains
The dollar remained volatile in Q3, with changing
fraught with considerable risks. The rise in tariffs
investor sentiment amid incoming data releases. In
has heightened the risk of supply chain disruptions
2025 so far, the US dollar has fallen by 9.5 per cent, as
that could impede the ongoing disinflation process
unpredictable policy decisions unsettled investors.
and constrain the space for monetary policy easing.
These movements were mirrored in EME currencies,
For emerging market economies, the external
exacerbated by swings in capital flows (Chart V.11b).
environment poses several challenges including weak
The MSCI emerging market currency index rose by global growth, high tariffs, heightened uncertainty,
5.3 per cent in Q2; however, Q3 saw a reversal due volatile capital flows, and geopolitical tensions.
102